1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
166 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 274215730 "scott"
169 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
170 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
171 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
182 by the \SpecialChar LyX
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
189 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
190 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
191 Documentation mailing list:
193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
195 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
207 \begin_inset Newline newline
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
217 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
221 \begin_inset Note Note
224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
225 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
226 \begin_inset Newline newline
231 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
239 \begin_layout Standard
240 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
241 LatexCommand tableofcontents
248 \begin_layout Chapter
252 \begin_layout Section
253 What is \SpecialChar LyX
257 \begin_layout Standard
259 is a document preparation system.
260 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
263 business letters and proposals,
265 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
269 It is unlike most other
270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
277 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
278 That means that when you type a section header,
280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
309 takes care of the typesetting for you;
310 so you deal only with concepts,
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
320 If you haven't read it yet,
326 \begin_layout Standard
331 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
334 the format of all of the manuals.
335 If you don't read it,
336 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
337 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
340 \begin_layout Section
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 Like most applications,
348 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
349 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
350 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
353 \begin_layout Standard
354 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
355 This is not a bug or an oversight,
357 When you read a book,
358 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
359 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
360 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
365 The first case is large images.
366 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
367 left click on the image and use the option
378 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
380 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
383 \begin_layout Standard
384 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
385 menus and toolbar buttons,
386 have a look at Appendix
391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
393 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
401 \begin_layout Section
405 \begin_layout Standard
406 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
408 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
410 Just select the manual you want to read from the
417 \begin_layout Section
418 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
431 can be configured via the menu
433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
437 \begin_inset Index idx
442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
449 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
452 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
453 packages are available.
454 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
455 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
456 was installed on your system,
457 you might have some items that you installed locally,
459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
463 \begin_inset space \space{}
466 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
468 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
470 To force \SpecialChar LyX
471 to re-inspect your system use
473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
477 \begin_inset Index idx
482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
483 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
489 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
490 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
493 \begin_layout Section
496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
498 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
505 \begin_layout Standard
506 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
507 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
508 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
510 or print your documents
514 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
515 Some \SpecialChar LyX
516 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
525 which can produce PDFs and the like.
528 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
533 every \SpecialChar LyX
534 document can still be output as plain text
535 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
542 \begin_layout Standard
543 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
545 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
549 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
550 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
553 \begin_layout Standard
554 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
555 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
556 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
558 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
566 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
573 \begin_inset Index idx
578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
579 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
587 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
594 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
598 \begin_layout Chapter
599 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
603 \begin_layout Section
604 Basic File Operations
605 \begin_inset Index idx
610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
619 \begin_layout Standard
624 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
627 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
696 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
708 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
722 \begin_layout Itemize
735 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
739 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
749 \begin_layout Itemize
772 \begin_layout Itemize
785 arg "buffer-write-as"
789 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
793 \begin_layout Itemize
795 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
807 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
811 \begin_layout Itemize
813 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
821 \begin_layout Itemize
835 \begin_layout Itemize
850 \begin_layout Standard
851 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
852 with a few minor differences.
855 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
866 command lists the available templates.
867 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
868 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
869 and possibly propose text fragments
873 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
876 you would otherwise need to
877 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
879 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
887 They can be of use for certain classes,
888 especially those for writing letters (see section
893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
895 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
902 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
903 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
906 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
914 \begin_layout Standard
915 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
948 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
949 to open a file or create a new one,
951 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
956 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
961 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
973 \begin_layout Standard
995 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
997 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1000 people work on the same document at the same time.
1004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1005 If you plan to do this,
1006 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1008 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1013 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1014 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1016 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1018 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1023 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1024 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1033 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1038 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1046 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1066 will reload the document from disk.
1067 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1068 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1075 \begin_inset space ~
1080 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1081 \change_inserted -712698321 1676620203
1085 \begin_layout Section
1087 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622914
1088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1090 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
1095 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
1098 \begin_layout Standard
1100 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623979
1102 lays much stress on safety.
1103 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
1104 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
1106 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
1108 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
1109 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
1110 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
1113 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
1114 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
1115 does not simply make a backup file,
1116 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
1117 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
1118 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1125 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1130 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
1133 \begin_layout Standard
1135 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624009
1137 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
1140 \begin_layout Subsection
1142 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624109
1146 \begin_layout Standard
1148 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629660
1151 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1153 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1167 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1172 in preferences (see section
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1179 reference "sec:Paths"
1188 then all backups are stored there.
1189 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1190 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1191 but also the path in their name,
1193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1212 \begin_layout Standard
1214 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624464
1215 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1216 and you need to enable
1217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1224 in order to see them.
1227 \begin_layout Standard
1229 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624516
1230 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1231 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1233 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1236 \begin_layout Subsection
1238 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633415
1242 \begin_layout Standard
1244 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624657
1247 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1255 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1260 As opposed to the backup files,
1261 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1264 \begin_layout Standard
1266 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624841
1267 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1286 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1292 with all changes saved.
1293 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1298 program crash or power outage),
1299 and this is when they might become useful.
1302 \begin_layout Subsection
1304 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633419
1308 \begin_layout Standard
1310 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629567
1312 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1313 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1314 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1315 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1318 \begin_layout Standard
1320 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625158
1321 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1332 myfile.lyx.emergency
1335 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1337 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1340 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1341 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1344 \begin_layout Subsection
1346 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633427
1347 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1351 \begin_layout Standard
1353 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625452
1354 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1355 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1357 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1360 keeps a copy of the old version,
1363 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1366 where <n> is the old format (e.
1367 \begin_inset space ~
1373 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1376 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1377 that is alongside the original document or,
1379 in the backup directory.
1382 \begin_layout Standard
1384 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625483
1385 As with backup files,
1386 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1390 \begin_layout Subsection
1392 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625510
1393 When to Use Which File?
1396 \begin_layout Standard
1398 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625539
1399 Now why all these files?
1400 Because they have different purposes.
1404 \begin_layout Standard
1406 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625820
1408 terminates unexpectedly,
1411 \begin_layout Enumerate
1413 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625790
1414 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1416 This file has the latest changes,
1417 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1420 \begin_layout Enumerate
1422 \change_inserted -712698321 1676634256
1423 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1428 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1430 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1432 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1433 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1435 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1438 \begin_layout Enumerate
1440 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626178
1441 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1442 use the backup file.
1443 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1444 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1445 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1448 \begin_layout Standard
1450 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626301
1451 The fourth type of file,
1452 the backup file from old versions,
1453 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1456 \begin_layout Standard
1458 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629641
1459 So much for the safety net.
1460 We hope you will not need it,
1462 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1463 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1468 \begin_layout Section
1469 Basic Editing Features
1470 \begin_inset Index idx
1475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1484 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1491 \begin_layout Standard
1492 Like most modern word processors,
1494 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1495 can move by character,
1498 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1499 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1500 editing features and how to access them.
1501 We will start with cut and paste.
1504 \begin_layout Standard
1505 As you might expect,
1510 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1511 along with various other editing features.
1512 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1516 \begin_layout Itemize
1522 \begin_inset Index idx
1527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1557 \begin_layout Itemize
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1598 \begin_layout Itemize
1604 \begin_inset Index idx
1609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1635 \begin_layout Itemize
1639 \begin_inset space ~
1645 \begin_layout Itemize
1649 \begin_inset space ~
1655 \begin_layout Itemize
1659 \begin_inset space ~
1663 \begin_inset space ~
1669 \begin_inset Index idx
1674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1683 \begin_inset Index idx
1688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1704 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1714 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1720 \begin_layout Standard
1721 The first three are self-explanatory.
1722 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1723 and other programs using
1745 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1750 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1751 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1752 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1753 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1757 \begin_inset space ~
1762 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1763 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1775 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1776 Possible formats include HTML,
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1797 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1803 \begin_inset space \space{}
1806 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1809 \begin_layout Standard
1813 \begin_inset space ~
1816 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1818 \begin_inset space ~
1822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1826 \begin_inset space ~
1835 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1836 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1837 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1847 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1848 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1853 \begin_inset space ~
1856 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1862 \begin_inset space ~
1870 \begin_inset space ~
1873 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1876 paste from the primary selection.
1877 This is normally the currently selected text.
1880 \begin_layout Standard
1883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1907 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1909 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1913 Once you have found a word or expression,
1917 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1922 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1936 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1966 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1974 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1979 \begin_inset space ~
1991 arg "word-find-backward"
1994 shortcut) to search backwards
1998 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1999 Even if you close the widget,
2009 arg "word-find-backward"
2012 will search further.
2017 \begin_layout Standard
2019 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
2024 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
2027 \begin_inset space ~
2032 field and searches the next match.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
2045 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
2047 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
2051 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
2055 the following options are available:
2058 \begin_layout Itemize
2061 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
2067 \begin_inset space ~
2073 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
2076 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
2077 If the toggle is set,
2079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2090 will not match the word
2091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2104 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
2108 \begin_layout Itemize
2111 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
2115 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
2119 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
2124 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
2125 to only find complete words,
2127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2131 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
2136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2161 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
2165 \begin_layout Itemize
2168 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
2173 will limit search and replace,
2175 to the current cursor selection.
2178 \begin_layout Itemize
2181 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
2186 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
2187 without pressing the
2190 \begin_inset space ~
2198 \begin_layout Itemize
2200 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
2205 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
2206 If this is not checked,
2207 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
2208 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
2209 so you need to put it back manually.
2212 \begin_layout Standard
2213 \paragraph_spacing single
2215 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2216 The widget also has a
2220 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
2221 hiding replace and options.
2224 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
2226 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2231 button brings you back to the full size.
2234 \begin_layout Standard
2235 \paragraph_spacing single
2238 also offers an advanced
2241 \begin_inset space ~
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2250 feature that is described in section
2251 \begin_inset space ~
2255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2257 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
2265 \begin_layout Standard
2269 \begin_inset space \space{}
2273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
2282 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
2286 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2293 \begin_layout Standard
2297 arg "inset-select-all"
2300 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2301 When the cursor is inside an inset
2304 arg "inset-select-all"
2307 selects the content of the inset.
2311 arg "inset-select-all"
2314 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2318 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2321 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2324 \begin_layout Section
2326 \begin_inset Index idx
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2338 \begin_inset Index idx
2343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2352 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2359 \begin_layout Standard
2360 If you make a mistake,
2361 you can easily recover from it.
2363 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2366 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2369 or the toolbar button
2376 If you accidentally undo too much,
2379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2382 or the toolbar button
2389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2396 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2400 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2405 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2406 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2415 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2416 This is a consequence of the 100
2417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2420 step undo limit mentioned above.
2423 \begin_layout Standard
2432 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2434 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2435 but by blocks of text.
2438 \begin_layout Section
2440 \begin_inset Index idx
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2454 \begin_layout Standard
2455 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2458 \begin_layout Enumerate
2463 \begin_layout Itemize
2468 once anywhere in the edit window.
2469 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2473 \begin_layout Enumerate
2478 \begin_layout Itemize
2485 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2488 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2491 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2492 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2494 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2495 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2500 \begin_layout Itemize
2501 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2511 \begin_layout Enumerate
2519 \begin_layout Standard
2520 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2521 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2525 \begin_layout Section
2527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2529 name "sec:Navigating"
2534 \begin_inset Index idx
2539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2548 \begin_layout Standard
2550 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2553 \begin_layout Itemize
2558 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2561 \begin_layout Itemize
2563 which is accessed either by the menu
2565 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2572 or by the toolbar button
2575 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2581 \begin_layout Itemize
2582 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2584 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2587 and use the same menu to return to them.
2588 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2591 \begin_layout Standard
2595 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2600 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2601 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2603 \begin_inset space ~
2608 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2609 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2612 \begin_layout Standard
2617 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2621 \begin_layout Subsection
2623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2625 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2630 \begin_inset Index idx
2635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2637 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2652 \begin_inset Index idx
2657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Standard
2667 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2669 labels and cross-references (see section
2670 \begin_inset space ~
2674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2676 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2683 or citations (see section
2684 \begin_inset space ~
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2690 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2696 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2699 \begin_layout Standard
2700 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2701 For example with citations,
2702 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2705 \begin_layout Standard
2710 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2712 if you are displaying the list of
2714 Labels and References
2716 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2717 you can enter the text
2718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2725 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2728 \begin_layout Standard
2729 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2734 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2735 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2740 option keeps it in the current view state.
2741 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2742 \begin_inset space ~
2745 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2746 \begin_inset space ~
2750 the subsections of sections
2751 \begin_inset space ~
2754 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2759 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2760 \begin_inset space ~
2765 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2774 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2784 button refreshes the TOC (
2785 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2787 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2791 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2793 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2797 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2801 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2805 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2809 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2811 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2815 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2817 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2821 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2823 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2827 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2831 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2833 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2837 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2841 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2845 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2853 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2857 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2861 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2865 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2867 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2871 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2884 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2886 you can move section
2887 \begin_inset space ~
2891 \begin_inset space ~
2894 2.4 or after section
2895 \begin_inset space ~
2900 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2913 (or the corresponding key bindings
2921 ) you can change the level of sections.
2922 You can make section
2923 \begin_inset space ~
2927 \begin_inset space ~
2931 \begin_inset space ~
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2942 \begin_layout Subsection
2943 Horizontal Scrolling
2944 \begin_inset Index idx
2949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2951 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2978 \begin_layout Standard
2980 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2981 \begin_inset space ~
2984 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2985 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2989 \begin_layout Standard
2990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2994 \begin_layout Itemize
2996 is used on a small tablet computer
2999 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
3004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3012 \begin_inset space ~
3025 \begin_layout Itemize
3026 Math constructs with long command names
3029 \begin_layout Standard
3030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
3031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
3032 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
3033 window so that table
3034 \begin_inset space ~
3038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3040 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3046 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
3047 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
3050 \begin_layout Standard
3051 \begin_inset Float table
3058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3059 \begin_inset Caption Standard
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3064 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3068 Horizontal scrolling test.
3076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3078 \begin_inset Tabular
3079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
3080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3125 \begin_layout Section
3126 Input/Word Completion
3127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3129 name "sec:Input-Completion"
3134 \begin_inset Index idx
3139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3146 \begin_inset Index idx
3151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3182 \begin_layout Standard
3184 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
3185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
3192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3204 \begin_inset space ~
3208 \begin_inset space ~
3213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
3217 \begin_inset space ~
3222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
3223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
3226 \begin_inset space ~
3232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
3233 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
3236 \begin_layout Standard
3238 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
3243 key to accept a proposed completion.
3244 If several completions are possible,
3245 a popup is opened showing them.
3246 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
3247 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
3258 \begin_layout Standard
3259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
3261 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
3264 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
3266 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
3269 he special math option
3273 enables characters to be composed.
3275 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
3278 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
3283 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
3286 you want to insert the character
3287 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
3292 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
3295 input the characters
3296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3308 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
3310 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
3314 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
3316 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
3321 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
3323 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
3326 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
3328 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
3330 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
3333 supported character combinations can be found in the file
3338 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
3340 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
3344 's installation folder.
3346 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
3347 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
3353 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
3358 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
3359 In the example above,
3365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3398 \begin_layout Section
3400 \begin_inset Index idx
3405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3412 \begin_inset Index idx
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3419 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 \begin_inset Index idx
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 \begin_layout Standard
3459 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3475 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3478 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3482 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3483 \begin_inset space ~
3487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3489 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3497 \begin_layout Standard
3502 \begin_inset space ~
3511 \begin_inset space ~
3536 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3540 \begin_layout Labeling
3541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3545 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3546 LatexCommand nomenclature
3548 description "Tabulator key"
3555 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3557 If you do not understand this,
3559 \begin_inset space ~
3563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3565 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3573 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3580 \begin_inset space ~
3584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3586 reference "subsec:Lists"
3595 If you are still confused,
3601 \begin_inset Newline newline
3609 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3610 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3613 \begin_layout Labeling
3614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3618 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3619 LatexCommand nomenclature
3621 description "Escape key"
3629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3638 to cancel operations.
3639 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3642 \begin_layout Labeling
3643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3648 These move the cursor,
3650 to the beginning and end of a line,
3651 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3654 \begin_layout Standard
3655 There are three modifier keys:
3658 \begin_layout Labeling
3659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3677 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3678 LatexCommand nomenclature
3680 description "Control key"
3685 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3689 \begin_layout Itemize
3699 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3702 \begin_layout Itemize
3712 it moves by words instead of characters.
3715 \begin_layout Itemize
3725 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3730 \begin_layout Labeling
3731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3749 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3750 LatexCommand nomenclature
3752 description "Shift key"
3757 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3760 \begin_layout Labeling
3761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3779 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3780 LatexCommand nomenclature
3782 description "Alt or Meta key"
3787 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3788 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3789 If you have both keys,
3790 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3795 \begin_inset Newline newline
3798 This key does many different things,
3799 but it also activates the
3801 menu accelerator keys
3804 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3805 it selects that menu item.
3809 \begin_layout Standard
3812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3818 \begin_inset space ~
3822 \begin_inset space ~
3828 \begin_inset space ~
3836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3855 \begin_inset space ~
3861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3871 \begin_layout Standard
3876 manual lists all other things bound to the
3884 \begin_layout Standard
3885 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3886 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3887 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3889 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3890 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3891 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3908 followed by a capital
3915 \begin_layout Chapter
3918 \begin_inset Index idx
3923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3926 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3943 \begin_layout Section
3945 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 \begin_layout Subsection
3973 \begin_layout Standard
3974 Before you do anything else,
3975 before you ever start writing a document,
3976 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3977 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3982 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3983 and format the title of your document differently.
3986 \begin_layout Standard
3991 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3992 By setting the document class,
3993 you automatically select these properties,
3994 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3995 If you don't choose a document class,
3997 picks one for you by default.
3998 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
4001 \begin_layout Subsection
4003 \begin_inset Index idx
4008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4010 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4027 name "sec:Document-Classes"
4034 \begin_layout Standard
4035 You can select a class using the
4037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4042 \begin_inset Index idx
4047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4049 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4064 Select the class you want to use,
4065 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
4068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4072 \begin_layout Standard
4073 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
4078 \begin_layout Description
4079 Article for basic articles
4082 \begin_layout Description
4083 Report for basic reports
4086 \begin_layout Description
4087 Book for writing a book
4090 \begin_layout Description
4091 Letter for US-style letters
4094 \begin_layout Standard
4095 There are also some non-standard classes,
4096 which \SpecialChar LyX
4097 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4099 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
4100 distributions will include many of these.
4101 Here are some of the classes.
4102 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
4104 Special Document Classes
4113 \begin_layout Description
4114 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
4117 \begin_layout Description
4118 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
4121 \begin_layout Description
4122 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
4125 \begin_layout Description
4126 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
4127 There are three article layouts available.
4128 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
4129 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
4130 All result-type statements (propositions,
4132 and so on) are sequenced together,
4135 and the like have their own sequence.
4137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4140 sequential numbering
4141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4144 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
4145 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
4146 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
4147 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
4150 \begin_layout Description
4151 Beamer Layout for presentations
4154 \begin_layout Description
4155 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
4156 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4158 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4162 \begin_layout Description
4163 Chess Layout to write about chess games
4166 \begin_layout Description
4168 \begin_inset space ~
4171 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
4174 \begin_layout Description
4175 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
4178 \begin_layout Description
4179 Foils Used to make transparencies
4182 \begin_layout Description
4183 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
4184 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4186 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4190 \begin_layout Description
4191 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
4194 \begin_layout Description
4195 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
4198 \begin_layout Description
4199 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
4202 \begin_layout Description
4203 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
4204 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
4205 automatic print space calculation etc.
4206 (Is used by this document.)
4209 \begin_layout Description
4210 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
4213 \begin_layout Description
4214 Powerdot Layout for presentations
4217 \begin_layout Description
4222 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
4223 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
4224 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
4225 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
4229 \begin_layout Description
4230 Slides Used to make transparencies
4233 \begin_layout Description
4235 \begin_inset space ~
4238 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
4241 \begin_layout Description
4242 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
4245 \begin_layout Standard
4246 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
4247 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
4249 Special Document Classes
4257 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
4260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4264 \begin_layout Standard
4265 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
4267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4268 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4272 \begin_inset Index idx
4277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4302 If you open a document that uses such a class,
4303 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
4304 So it may seem that something is wrong.
4307 \begin_layout Standard
4310 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
4317 are highly specialized.
4319 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
4320 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
4321 with a growing number.
4322 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
4323 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
4324 There are just too many of them.
4325 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
4328 \begin_layout Standard
4329 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
4330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4338 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
4339 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
4341 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
4344 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
4351 manual for information on how to install them.
4352 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
4358 \begin_layout Standard
4359 Although \SpecialChar LyX
4360 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
4361 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
4363 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
4364 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
4365 The \SpecialChar LyX
4366 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
4369 users can write their own layout files,
4370 and many users have done so.
4373 Installing New Document Classes,
4381 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
4384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4388 name "subsec:Modules"
4393 \begin_inset Index idx
4398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4400 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4419 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4420 This is not available in any document class,
4421 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4427 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4431 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4438 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4453 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4456 \begin_layout Standard
4457 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4458 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4460 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4461 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4462 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4463 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4464 since \SpecialChar LyX
4465 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4466 file without the missing prerequisites.
4467 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4468 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4471 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4475 \begin_inset Index idx
4480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4488 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4496 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4505 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4507 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4518 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4531 Some modules require other modules,
4532 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4534 will advise you about these things.
4542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4546 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4551 \begin_inset Index idx
4556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4575 \begin_layout Standard
4576 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4577 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4579 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4580 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4581 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4584 a particular document has very special needs,
4585 but you need a specific inset or
4586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4588 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4591 style only that one time.
4592 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4594 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4612 manual for information on how to use it.
4615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4620 Each class has a default set of options.
4621 Here's a quick table describing them:
4624 \begin_layout Standard
4625 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4631 \begin_layout Standard
4633 \begin_inset Tabular
4634 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4635 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4636 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4637 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4639 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5094 \begin_layout Standard
5095 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
5101 \begin_layout Standard
5102 You're probably also wondering what
5103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5107 \begin_inset space ~
5111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5115 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
5116 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
5122 the rest do not and begin instead with the
5127 Some document classes,
5128 such as the ones for letters,
5129 don't use any section headings.
5150 We will describe these headings fully in section
5151 \begin_inset space ~
5155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5157 reference "subsec:Headings"
5165 \begin_layout Subsection
5167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5169 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
5174 \begin_inset Index idx
5179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5181 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5196 \begin_inset Index idx
5201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5203 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5220 \begin_layout Standard
5221 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
5223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5230 \begin_inset space ~
5238 \begin_inset space ~
5244 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
5245 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
5246 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
5247 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
5248 -class and its options,
5249 you have to read its manual.
5252 \begin_layout Standard
5254 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
5258 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
5262 \begin_inset space ~
5269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset space ~
5280 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
5281 You can choose between the following five options:
5284 \begin_layout Labeling
5285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5290 Use default page style of current class.
5293 \begin_layout Labeling
5294 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5299 No page numbers or headings.
5302 \begin_layout Labeling
5303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5311 \begin_layout Labeling
5312 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5317 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
5318 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
5319 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
5322 \begin_layout Labeling
5323 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5328 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5334 \begin_inset Index idx
5339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5357 How they are defined is explained in section
5358 \begin_inset space ~
5362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5364 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
5372 \begin_layout Standard
5373 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
5374 \begin_inset space ~
5378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5380 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5388 \begin_layout Subsection
5389 Paper Size and Orientation
5390 \begin_inset Index idx
5395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5397 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5414 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5421 \begin_layout Standard
5422 You can find the following options in the menu
5425 \begin_inset space ~
5432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5436 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5443 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5460 \begin_layout Labeling
5461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5465 \begin_inset space ~
5470 What size paper to print on.
5475 \begin_layout Itemize
5481 \begin_layout Itemize
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
5493 \begin_layout Itemize
5499 \begin_layout Itemize
5507 \begin_layout Itemize
5513 \begin_layout Itemize
5520 \begin_layout Labeling
5521 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5526 To choose whether to output as
5537 \begin_layout Labeling
5538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5542 \begin_inset space ~
5547 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5548 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5551 \begin_layout Subsection
5553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5555 name "subsec:Margins"
5560 \begin_inset Index idx
5565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5567 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5582 \begin_inset Index idx
5587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5596 \begin_layout Standard
5597 Paper margins are set in the menu
5599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5603 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5610 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5627 \begin_layout Standard
5628 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5629 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5632 \begin_layout Subsection
5636 \begin_layout Standard
5637 If you change a document class,
5639 has to convert everything into the new class.
5640 That includes the paragraph environments.
5641 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5642 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5643 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5644 If this is the case,
5645 and you change the document class,
5647 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5656 The name of the style is retained,
5657 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5658 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5659 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5662 \begin_layout Section
5663 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5664 \begin_inset Index idx
5669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5671 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5688 \begin_layout Subsection
5690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5692 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5699 \begin_layout Standard
5700 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5701 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5704 \begin_layout Standard
5705 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5706 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5707 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5708 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5712 paragraph of a section,
5723 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5724 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5726 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 The space between paragraphs,
5731 like the line spacing,
5732 the space between headings and text —
5734 all the spacing for just about everything —
5735 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5738 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5742 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5745 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5746 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5753 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5754 goes to produce a printable file.
5760 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5762 gives you the ability globally to change
5766 these pre-coded spacings.
5767 We will explain more later.
5770 \begin_layout Subsection
5771 Paragraph Separation
5772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5774 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5779 \begin_inset Index idx
5784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5803 \begin_layout Standard
5811 \begin_inset space ~
5819 \begin_inset space ~
5826 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5830 \begin_inset Index idx
5835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5837 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5851 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5855 \begin_layout Subsection
5859 \begin_layout Standard
5860 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5863 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5865 \begin_inset space ~
5870 dialog and toggle the
5873 \begin_inset space ~
5878 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5881 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5885 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5886 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5889 \begin_layout Standard
5890 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5893 \begin_layout Subsection
5895 \begin_inset Index idx
5900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5902 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5926 \begin_inset Index idx
5931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5933 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5947 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5950 \begin_inset space ~
5959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5960 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5966 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5988 installed to use this feature.
5993 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5995 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5997 \begin_inset space ~
6002 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
6005 \begin_layout Section
6006 Paragraph Environments
6007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6009 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
6014 \begin_inset Index idx
6019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6021 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6036 \begin_inset Index idx
6041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6042 Paragraph environments
6050 \begin_layout Subsection
6054 \begin_layout Standard
6055 Paragraph environments correspond to the
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6067 } \SpecialChar ldots
6077 \begin_inset Newline newline
6080 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6082 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
6084 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
6085 we urge you to read the
6094 also contains many more examples than this section does.
6097 \begin_layout Standard
6098 A paragraph environment is simply a
6099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6106 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
6107 This can include a particular style of font,
6114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6121 the different environments inside one another,
6122 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
6123 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
6124 on the fly margin adjustment,
6125 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
6126 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
6127 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 To choose a new paragraph environment,
6132 use the pull-down box
6133 \begin_inset Graphics
6134 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
6140 at the left end of the toolbar.
6142 will change the environment of the
6146 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
6147 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
6150 \begin_layout Standard
6159 create a new paragraph using the
6163 paragraph environment.
6165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6172 because if you are in one of these environments:
6175 \begin_layout Itemize
6181 \begin_layout Itemize
6187 \begin_layout Itemize
6193 \begin_layout Itemize
6199 \begin_layout Itemize
6205 \begin_layout Itemize
6211 \begin_layout Itemize
6217 \begin_layout Standard
6219 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
6224 rather than resetting it to
6229 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
6230 \begin_inset space ~
6234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6236 reference "sec:Nesting"
6244 \begin_layout Subsection
6248 \begin_layout Standard
6249 The default paragraph environment is
6254 It creates a plain paragraph.
6256 resets the paragraph environment,
6257 this is the one it chooses.
6259 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
6266 \begin_layout Standard
6267 You can nest a paragraph using the
6271 environment in just about anything else,
6272 but you can't really nest anything in a
6279 \begin_layout Subsection
6281 \begin_inset Index idx
6286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6288 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6305 \begin_layout Standard
6306 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
6307 title page has three parts:
6309 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
6310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6317 for thanks or contact information.
6318 For certain types of documents,
6320 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
6321 For other types of documents,
6323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6330 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
6333 \begin_layout Standard
6335 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
6350 Here's how you use them:
6353 \begin_layout Itemize
6354 Put the title of your document in the
6361 \begin_layout Itemize
6362 Put the author name in the
6369 \begin_layout Itemize
6370 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
6371 want to use a fixed date,
6372 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
6373 put that text in the
6378 Note that using this environment is optional.
6379 If you don't provide any,
6381 will automatically insert today's date.
6382 If you don't want a date,
6385 Suppress default date on front page
6389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6390 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6392 \begin_inset space ~
6400 \begin_layout Standard
6401 You can use footnotes to insert
6402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6409 or contact information.
6412 \begin_layout Subsection
6414 \begin_inset Index idx
6419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6428 name "subsec:Headings"
6435 \begin_layout Standard
6436 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6438 takes care of the numbering for you.
6441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6443 \begin_inset Index idx
6448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6450 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6467 \begin_layout Standard
6468 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6472 \begin_layout Enumerate
6478 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 \begin_layout Enumerate
6490 \begin_layout Enumerate
6496 \begin_layout Enumerate
6502 \begin_layout Enumerate
6508 \begin_layout Enumerate
6514 \begin_layout Standard
6516 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6517 separated by periods.
6518 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6519 Unlike the other headings,
6520 parts are numbered with
6521 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6523 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6525 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6532 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6534 suppose you're writing a book.
6535 You group the book into chapters.
6537 does a similar grouping:
6540 \begin_layout Itemize
6545 is divided into either
6556 \begin_layout Itemize
6568 \begin_layout Itemize
6580 \begin_layout Itemize
6592 \begin_layout Itemize
6604 \begin_layout Itemize
6616 \begin_layout Standard
6617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6626 Not all document types use the
6630 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6635 is the top-level heading.
6643 \begin_layout Standard
6649 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6651 labels it with its number,
6652 along with the number of the subsection,
6655 chapter that it's in.
6657 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6670 \begin_inset Index idx
6675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6677 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 \begin_layout Standard
6695 The unnumbered section headings have a
6696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6703 at the end of their name.
6704 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6706 \begin_inset space ~
6710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6721 Changing the Numbering
6722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6724 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6731 \begin_layout Standard
6732 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6734 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6735 that's preset in the document class.
6736 Just as certain classes start with
6751 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6761 This is something you can change.
6764 \begin_layout Standard
6767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6771 \begin_inset Index idx
6776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6795 \begin_inset space ~
6799 \begin_inset space ~
6804 you will see two counters.
6809 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6810 numbers a section heading.
6811 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6814 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6815 Short Titles of Headings
6816 \begin_inset Index idx
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6850 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6857 \begin_layout Standard
6858 Some section or chapter titles,
6861 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6863 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6864 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6867 \begin_layout Standard
6869 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6870 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6871 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6872 To specify a short title,
6873 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6877 \begin_inset space ~
6883 This will insert a box labeled
6884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6888 \begin_inset space ~
6892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6895 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6896 This also works for captions inside floats.
6897 There can only be one short title per title.
6900 \begin_layout Standard
6901 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6908 \begin_layout Standard
6909 The following information applies to all section headings:
6912 \begin_layout Itemize
6913 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6916 \begin_layout Itemize
6917 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6920 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6924 \begin_layout Itemize
6925 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6928 \begin_layout Subsection
6932 \begin_layout Standard
6934 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6950 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6951 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6952 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6953 They also allow nesting,
6963 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6966 \begin_layout Standard
6967 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6976 when you start a new paragraph.
6978 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6982 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6985 once you are done typing in that poem,
6986 you have to change back to the
6990 environment yourself.
6993 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7002 \begin_inset Index idx
7007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 \begin_layout Standard
7017 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
7018 it's time for the differences.
7027 are identical except for one difference:
7032 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
7041 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
7044 \begin_layout Standard
7045 Here's an example of the
7059 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
7060 See – no indentation!
7064 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
7066 there's no indentation,
7067 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
7070 \begin_layout Standard
7071 Here's another example,
7079 \begin_layout Quotation
7086 you will see the indentation.
7087 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
7092 is the environment for you!
7098 you were quoting other text.
7101 \begin_layout Quotation
7102 Here's a new paragraph.
7103 I could ramble on and on,
7104 like a politician at election time.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 As the examples show,
7116 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
7117 They should put quotes in the
7122 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
7126 paragraph environment for quoted text.
7129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7131 \begin_inset Index idx
7136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7138 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7153 \begin_inset Index idx
7158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7174 \begin_layout Standard
7179 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
7188 \begin_inset Newline newline
7191 Which I did not rehearse!
7195 It could be much worse.
7196 This line could be long,
7199 so very long that it wraps around.
7200 It looks okay on screen,
7201 but in the printed version,
7202 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
7204 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
7210 \begin_inset Newline newline
7213 And make things look fine
7214 \begin_inset Newline newline
7220 arg "newline-insert newline"
7226 \begin_layout Standard
7232 does not indent both margins.
7233 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
7234 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
7238 arg "newline-insert newline"
7244 \begin_layout Subsection
7246 \begin_inset Index idx
7251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7267 \begin_layout Standard
7269 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
7280 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
7292 lets you provide your own label.
7293 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
7296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7301 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
7304 treats each paragraph as a list item.
7313 reset the environment to
7317 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
7318 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
7319 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
7323 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
7327 If you do this at the top level of a list,
7328 it returns you to the
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
7339 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
7340 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
7341 we suggest you read all of section
7342 \begin_inset space ~
7346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7348 reference "sec:Nesting"
7356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7358 \begin_inset Index idx
7363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7389 \begin_layout Standard
7390 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7394 paragraph environment.
7395 It has the following properties:
7398 \begin_layout Itemize
7399 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7403 \begin_layout Itemize
7405 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7408 \begin_layout Itemize
7409 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7413 \begin_layout Itemize
7414 The items can have any length.
7416 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7417 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7424 \begin_layout Itemize
7429 environment inside another
7434 the label changes to a new symbol.
7438 \begin_layout Itemize
7439 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7442 \begin_layout Itemize
7444 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7447 \begin_layout Itemize
7449 \begin_inset space ~
7453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7455 reference "sec:Nesting"
7460 for a full explanation of nesting.
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7466 that explanation was also an example of an
7475 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7478 \begin_layout Standard
7479 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7480 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7483 \begin_layout Itemize
7484 The label for the first level
7488 is a large black dot,
7493 \begin_layout Itemize
7494 The label for the second level is a dash.
7498 \begin_layout Itemize
7499 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7503 \begin_layout Itemize
7504 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7508 \begin_layout Itemize
7509 Back out to the third level.
7513 \begin_layout Itemize
7514 Back to the second level.
7518 \begin_layout Itemize
7519 Back to the outermost level.
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7523 These are the default labels for an
7528 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7533 dialog in the submenu
7538 \begin_inset Index idx
7543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7545 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7559 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7563 \begin_layout Standard
7564 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7565 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7566 \begin_inset space ~
7570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7572 reference "sec:Nesting"
7580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7582 \begin_inset Index idx
7587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7606 name "sec:Enumerate"
7613 \begin_layout Standard
7618 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7619 It has these properties:
7622 \begin_layout Enumerate
7623 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7627 \begin_layout Enumerate
7628 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7632 \begin_layout Enumerate
7634 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7637 \begin_layout Enumerate
7642 environment resets the counter to one.
7645 \begin_layout Enumerate
7659 \begin_layout Enumerate
7660 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7661 Items can have any length.
7664 \begin_layout Enumerate
7665 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7668 \begin_layout Enumerate
7669 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7672 \begin_layout Enumerate
7673 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7677 \begin_layout Standard
7687 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7689 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7690 labels the four different levels in an
7697 \begin_layout Enumerate
7698 The first level of an
7702 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7706 \begin_layout Enumerate
7707 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7711 \begin_layout Enumerate
7712 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7716 \begin_layout Enumerate
7717 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7720 \begin_layout Enumerate
7722 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7726 \begin_layout Enumerate
7727 Back to the third level
7731 \begin_layout Enumerate
7732 Back to the second level.
7736 \begin_layout Enumerate
7737 Back to the outermost level.
7740 \begin_layout Standard
7741 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7747 \begin_inset space ~
7751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7753 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7759 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7760 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7764 \begin_layout Standard
7765 There is more to nesting
7769 environments than we've stated here.
7770 You should read section
7771 \begin_inset space ~
7775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7777 reference "sec:Nesting"
7782 to learn more about nesting.
7785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7787 \begin_inset Index idx
7792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7794 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Standard
7812 Unlike the previous two environments,
7817 list has no fixed label.
7821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7828 of the first line as the label.
7832 \begin_layout Description
7834 This is an example of the
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7843 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7846 \begin_layout Standard
7848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7855 it is meant that the first usage of the
7859 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7860 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7861 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7865 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7874 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7880 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7882 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7884 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7888 \begin_inset space ~
7895 \begin_inset space ~
7899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7901 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7906 for more information.) Here is an example:
7909 \begin_layout Description
7911 \begin_inset space ~
7915 This one shows how to use a
7916 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7920 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7924 \begin_inset space ~
7936 \begin_layout Description
7942 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7943 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7944 It's not a good idea to use a
7948 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7949 You're better off using
7961 paragraphs into them.
7964 \begin_layout Description
7970 environments inside one another,
7971 nest them in other types of lists,
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7976 Notice that after the first line,
7978 indents subsequent lines,
7979 offsetting them from the first line.
7982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7991 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8008 \begin_layout Standard
8013 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8014 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8018 \begin_layout Standard
8027 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
8028 Here are its properties:
8031 \begin_layout Labeling
8032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8037 labels \SpecialChar LyX
8039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8046 of each line as the item label.
8051 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
8052 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
8054 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
8056 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
8059 space as described above.
8062 \begin_layout Labeling
8063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8064 margins As you can see,
8066 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
8067 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
8068 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
8071 \begin_layout Labeling
8072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8074 \begin_inset space ~
8077 width \SpecialChar LyX
8078 uses the width of the label,
8079 or the default width,
8081 If the label width is larger,
8083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8090 into the first line.
8092 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
8095 \begin_layout Labeling
8096 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8098 \begin_inset space ~
8101 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
8105 environment has the same left margin.
8106 \begin_inset Newline newline
8109 To change the default width,
8110 select all items in the list.
8113 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8115 \begin_inset space ~
8120 dialog (toolbar button
8123 arg "layout-paragraph"
8130 \begin_inset space ~
8135 determines the default label width.
8136 You can use the text of your largest label here,
8137 but you can also use the letter
8138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8145 multiple times instead.
8146 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
8149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8156 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
8159 \begin_inset space ~
8164 every time you alter a label in a
8169 \begin_inset Newline newline
8172 The predefined default width is the length of
8173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8181 \begin_inset space ~
8187 \begin_layout Standard
8192 list the same way as the
8197 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
8202 environment gives you another way to do this,
8203 using a different overall layout.
8206 \begin_layout Standard
8211 lists inside one another,
8212 nest them in other types of lists,
8214 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
8216 \begin_inset space ~
8220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8222 reference "sec:Nesting"
8227 to learn about nesting.
8230 \begin_layout Standard
8231 There is yet another feature of the
8236 As you can see in the examples,
8238 left-justifies the item labels by default.
8239 You can use additional
8242 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
8247 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
8248 justifies the item label.
8252 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
8254 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
8256 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
8261 are documented in section
8262 \begin_inset space ~
8266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8268 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
8274 Here are some examples:
8277 \begin_layout Labeling
8278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8279 Left The default for
8286 \begin_layout Labeling
8287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8288 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8294 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
8299 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
8302 \begin_layout Labeling
8303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8304 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8314 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
8319 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
8322 \begin_layout Subsection
8324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8326 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
8331 \begin_inset Index idx
8336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8338 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 The features described in this section require that the module
8358 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
8360 is loaded in the document settings.
8361 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8367 \begin_inset Index idx
8372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8375 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8393 Custom Enumerate Lists
8394 \begin_inset Index idx
8399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8411 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8430 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8435 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8436 There you add the command
8439 \begin_layout Standard
8447 \begin_layout Standard
8459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8460 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8469 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8483 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8490 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8491 For capital Roman numerals replace
8503 in the command above.
8504 For Arabic numerals use
8512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8519 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8535 \begin_layout Standard
8537 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8546 You can only number 26
8547 \begin_inset space ~
8550 items with Latin letters,
8551 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8559 \begin_layout Standard
8560 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8561 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8567 \begin_layout Standard
8568 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8571 \begin_layout Enumerate
8572 \begin_inset Argument 1
8575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8601 \begin_layout Enumerate
8602 \begin_inset Argument 1
8605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8628 \begin_layout Enumerate
8633 \begin_layout Enumerate
8634 \begin_inset Argument 1
8637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8661 \begin_layout Enumerate
8662 \begin_inset Argument 1
8665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8691 \begin_layout Standard
8692 For this list these commands were used:
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8706 \begin_inset Newline newline
8714 \begin_inset Newline newline
8722 \begin_inset Newline newline
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8739 makes the label emphasized and
8748 \begin_layout Standard
8749 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8758 When you change the label of a list level,
8759 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8769 \begin_inset Index idx
8774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8776 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 \begin_layout Standard
8804 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8807 \begin_layout Enumerate
8808 \begin_inset Argument 1
8811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8830 \begin_inset Note Note
8833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 goes back to default numbering
8842 \begin_layout Enumerate
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8854 \begin_layout Standard
8855 To resume an enumeration,
8862 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8863 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8864 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8871 \begin_layout Standard
8872 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8881 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8882 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8891 \begin_layout Standard
8892 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8893 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8894 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8905 \begin_layout Standard
8910 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8914 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 \begin_layout Standard
8923 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8926 \begin_layout Enumerate
8927 \begin_inset Argument 1
8930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8946 This enumeration starts at 4
8949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8951 \begin_inset Index idx
8956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8976 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8977 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8980 \begin_layout Itemize
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8985 with standard spacing
8988 \begin_layout Standard
8989 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8990 Add there the command
8994 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8997 \begin_layout Itemize
8998 \begin_inset Argument 1
9001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9020 \begin_layout Itemize
9024 \begin_layout Itemize
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9035 \begin_inset Index idx
9040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9043 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9058 For more information see its documentation,
9060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9070 \begin_layout Standard
9071 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
9072 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
9073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9076 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
9079 \begin_layout Enumerate
9080 \begin_inset Argument 1
9083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 \begin_layout Enumerate
9106 with negative indentation
9109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9110 Further Customization
9111 \begin_inset Index idx
9116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9118 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9135 \begin_layout Standard
9136 You can also change the style of description lists.
9140 \begin_layout Standard
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 changes the description label font,
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9157 \begin_layout Standard
9158 sets the list style.
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 An example where the command
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_layout Description
9180 \begin_inset space ~
9185 \begin_inset Argument 1
9188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9209 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
9210 therefore ionizing them.
9213 \begin_layout Description
9215 \begin_inset space ~
9219 In computer science,
9220 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
9222 or handles to a resource such as an object,
9224 disk space or other resource.
9227 \begin_layout Standard
9228 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9234 \begin_inset Index idx
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9257 For more information see its documentation
9258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9268 \begin_layout Subsection
9270 \begin_inset Index idx
9275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9286 \begin_inset space ~
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9294 Although \SpecialChar LyX
9295 has document classes for letters,
9296 we've also created two paragraph environments called
9303 \begin_inset space ~
9309 To use the letter class,
9310 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
9311 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
9312 gags on the document.
9321 \begin_inset space ~
9326 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
9327 You can even nest them inside other environments,
9328 though you can't nest anything in them.
9331 \begin_layout Standard
9333 you're not limited to using
9340 \begin_inset space ~
9349 \begin_inset space ~
9356 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
9359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9363 name "sec:Address-Usage"
9370 \begin_layout Standard
9375 environment formats text in the style of an address,
9376 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
9381 \begin_inset space ~
9386 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9387 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9388 Here's an example of each:
9391 \begin_layout Right Address
9393 \begin_inset Newline newline
9397 \begin_inset Newline newline
9401 \begin_inset Newline newline
9408 \begin_layout Standard
9412 \begin_inset space ~
9418 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9419 which \SpecialChar LyX
9420 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9421 Here's an example of the
9428 \begin_layout Address
9430 \begin_inset Newline newline
9433 Where do I send this
9434 \begin_inset Newline newline
9437 Your post office and country
9440 \begin_layout Standard
9449 \begin_inset space ~
9454 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9459 in either of these environments,
9461 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9476 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9485 arg "newline-insert newline"
9490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9493 \begin_inset space ~
9497 \begin_inset space ~
9502 ) to start a new line in an
9509 \begin_inset space ~
9517 \begin_layout Subsection
9521 \begin_layout Standard
9522 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9524 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9529 \begin_inset Index idx
9534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9543 \begin_layout Standard
9548 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9550 you could use this environment anywhere,
9551 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9554 don't bother trying to nest
9558 in anything else or vice versa.
9564 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9565 The book document classes ignores the
9570 and it's utterly silly to use
9574 in a letter document class.
9577 \begin_layout Standard
9582 environment does several things for you.
9584 it puts the centered label
9585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9593 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9595 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9596 just as you'd expect.
9598 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9600 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9602 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9605 \begin_layout Standard
9606 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9610 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9611 The new paragraph will still be in the
9617 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9620 \begin_layout Standard
9621 \begin_inset Float figure
9628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9630 \begin_inset Graphics
9631 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9639 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9644 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9665 \begin_layout Standard
9666 We would love to demonstrate the
9671 but since this document is in the
9672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9681 We inserted it therefore as figure
9682 \begin_inset space ~
9686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9688 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9694 If you have never heard of an
9695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9703 you can safely ignore this environment.
9706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9708 \begin_inset Index idx
9713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9722 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9734 environment is used to list references.
9736 you could use this environment anywhere,
9737 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9749 \begin_layout Standard
9750 When you first open a
9756 adds a large vertical space,
9757 followed by the heading
9758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9773 depending on the document class.
9774 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9775 Each paragraph of the
9779 environment is a bibliography entry.
9785 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9786 Each new paragraph is still in the
9793 \begin_layout Standard
9795 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9797 For more information on that,
9798 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9799 's bibliography handling,
9800 have a look at section
9801 \begin_inset space ~
9805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9807 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9815 \begin_layout Subsection
9816 Special Environments
9819 \begin_layout Standard
9821 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9829 \begin_inset Index idx
9834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9844 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9851 \begin_layout Standard
9857 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9859 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9864 key as a fixed whitespace.
9868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9880 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9884 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9888 \begin_inset space ~
9892 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9894 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9899 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9918 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9920 If you need to insert blank lines,
9921 you will still need to use
9924 arg "newline-insert newline"
9943 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9945 when you finish using the
9951 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9958 environment inside of others.
9961 \begin_layout Standard
9962 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9965 \begin_layout Itemize
9969 arg "newline-insert newline"
9972 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9977 \begin_inset space \space{}
9987 arg "newline-insert newline"
9993 \begin_layout Itemize
9997 arg "newline-insert newline"
10007 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10013 \begin_layout Itemize
10014 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
10015 You must put at least one
10019 in any line you want blank.
10025 \begin_layout Itemize
10026 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
10030 since that will insert
10035 You get the typewriter double quotes with
10038 arg "self-insert \""
10044 \begin_layout Standard
10045 Here is an example:
10048 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10052 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10056 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10060 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10064 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10065 printf("Hello World!
10070 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10074 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10078 \begin_layout Standard
10079 This is just the standard
10080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10090 \begin_layout Standard
10098 such as program source,
10099 shell scripts and so on.
10100 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
10101 \begin_inset Index idx
10106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10107 Paragraph environments
10112 For longer parts of programming code,
10113 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
10115 Program Code Listings
10120 \begin_inset space ~
10128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10132 \begin_inset Index idx
10137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10151 environment is similar to the
10156 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
10161 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
10175 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
10176 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
10178 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
10181 space) and you can have empty lines.
10195 \begin_layout Itemize
10196 have a certain language and a text style
10199 \begin_layout Itemize
10200 contain hyperlinks,
10202 foot- and margin notes,
10206 index- and nomenclature entries,
10211 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
10215 \begin_layout Standard
10216 Because of these properties
10220 works like a typewriter.
10221 Here is an example:
10224 \begin_layout Verbatim
10229 \begin_layout Verbatim
10233 The following 2 lines are empty:
10236 \begin_layout Verbatim
10240 \begin_layout Verbatim
10244 \begin_layout Verbatim
10246 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
10251 \begin_layout Standard
10256 environment is identical to
10260 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
10261 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
10268 \begin_layout Verbatim*
10273 \begin_layout Section
10274 Nesting Environments
10275 \begin_inset Index idx
10280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10306 \begin_layout Subsection
10310 \begin_layout Standard
10312 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
10313 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
10314 For example you have three main points in an outline,
10315 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
10317 you have a list inside of another list,
10318 with the inner list
10319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10329 \begin_layout Enumerate
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10338 \begin_layout Enumerate
10342 \begin_layout Enumerate
10347 \begin_layout Enumerate
10351 \begin_layout Standard
10352 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
10353 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
10356 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10358 \begin_inset space ~
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_inset space ~
10379 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
10380 Instead of the menu,
10381 you can also use the toolbar buttons
10384 arg "depth-increment"
10390 arg "depth-decrement"
10393 or the key bindings
10404 arg "depth-increment"
10410 arg "depth-decrement"
10414 The change will work on the current selection,
10415 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10416 or the current paragraph.
10419 \begin_layout Standard
10420 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10421 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10422 If it is invalid to do so,
10423 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10425 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10426 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10431 In \SpecialChar LyX
10433 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10434 as you're about to find out.
10435 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10438 \begin_layout Subsection
10439 What You Can and Can't Nest
10442 \begin_layout Standard
10443 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10444 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10447 \begin_layout Standard
10448 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10449 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10452 \begin_layout Itemize
10453 Completely unnestable
10456 \begin_layout Itemize
10458 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10461 \begin_layout Itemize
10463 you can nest them into other environments,
10464 but you can't nest anything into them.
10467 \begin_layout Standard
10468 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10469 and which paragraph environments have them:
10472 \begin_layout Description
10473 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10474 Can't nest into them.
10478 \begin_layout Itemize
10484 \begin_layout Itemize
10490 \begin_layout Itemize
10496 \begin_layout Itemize
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10509 \begin_layout Description
10511 \begin_inset space ~
10514 Nestable You can nest them.
10515 You can nest other things into them.
10519 \begin_layout Itemize
10525 \begin_layout Itemize
10531 \begin_layout Itemize
10537 \begin_layout Itemize
10543 \begin_layout Itemize
10549 \begin_layout Itemize
10555 \begin_layout Itemize
10561 \begin_layout Itemize
10568 \begin_layout Itemize
10574 \begin_layout Itemize
10581 \begin_layout Description
10582 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10583 You can't nest anything into them.
10587 \begin_layout Itemize
10593 \begin_layout Itemize
10599 \begin_layout Itemize
10605 \begin_layout Itemize
10611 \begin_layout Itemize
10617 \begin_layout Itemize
10623 \begin_layout Itemize
10629 \begin_layout Itemize
10635 \begin_layout Itemize
10641 \begin_layout Itemize
10647 \begin_layout Itemize
10653 \begin_layout Itemize
10659 \begin_layout Itemize
10665 \begin_layout Itemize
10669 \begin_inset space ~
10675 \begin_layout Itemize
10682 \begin_layout Standard
10683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10692 Although it is possible,
10694 to nest numbered section headings like
10705 \begin_inset space ~
10709 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10717 \begin_layout Subsection
10718 Nesting Other Things:
10723 \begin_inset Index idx
10728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10730 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10749 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10753 \begin_layout Itemize
10757 \begin_layout Itemize
10761 \begin_layout Itemize
10765 \begin_layout Standard
10767 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10776 Figures and tables in
10780 are not affected by this.
10785 Have a look at section
10786 \begin_inset space ~
10790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10792 reference "sec:Floats"
10797 for more information about
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10809 or an equation is inline,
10810 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10813 \begin_layout Standard
10815 if you have an equation,
10816 figure or table in a
10817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10825 it behaves just like a
10826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10833 paragraph environment.
10834 You can nest it into any environment,
10835 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 Here's an example with a table:
10842 \begin_layout Enumerate
10847 \begin_layout Enumerate
10848 This is (a) and it's nested.
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10859 \begin_layout Standard
10861 \begin_inset Tabular
10862 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10863 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10949 \begin_layout Standard
10950 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10957 \begin_layout Enumerate
10959 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10963 \begin_layout Enumerate
10967 \begin_layout Standard
10968 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10969 the list would look like this:
10972 \begin_layout Enumerate
10977 \begin_layout Enumerate
10978 This is (a) and it's nested.
10982 \begin_layout Standard
10983 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10989 \begin_layout Standard
10991 \begin_inset Tabular
10992 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10993 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10995 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11086 \begin_layout Enumerate
11094 it's not nested at all.
11097 \begin_layout Enumerate
11101 \begin_layout Standard
11102 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
11103 but is also the first item of a new list!
11106 \begin_layout Standard
11107 There's another trap you can fall into:
11109 but not going deep enough.
11111 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
11114 \begin_layout Enumerate
11119 \begin_layout Enumerate
11120 This is (a) and it's nested.
11123 \begin_layout Standard
11124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11130 \begin_layout Standard
11132 \begin_inset Tabular
11133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11221 \begin_layout Standard
11222 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11228 \begin_layout Enumerate
11230 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
11238 \begin_layout Enumerate
11242 \begin_layout Standard
11244 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
11250 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
11252 if you nest tables,
11253 figures or equations,
11254 make sure you go to the right depth!
11257 \begin_layout Subsection
11258 Usage and General Features
11261 \begin_layout Standard
11262 Speaking of levels,
11264 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
11267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11274 is the innermost possible depth.
11275 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
11278 \begin_layout Enumerate
11279 level #1 – outermost
11283 \begin_layout Enumerate
11288 \begin_layout Enumerate
11293 \begin_layout Enumerate
11298 \begin_layout Itemize
11303 \begin_layout Itemize
11312 \begin_layout Standard
11313 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
11314 and you can see both of them in the example.
11315 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
11316 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
11326 if we tried to nest another
11331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11339 we would get errors.
11342 \begin_layout Subsection
11344 \begin_inset Index idx
11349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11351 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11368 \begin_layout Standard
11369 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
11370 We have several examples of nested environments.
11372 we explain how we created the example,
11373 so that you can reproduce them.
11376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11378 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
11381 \begin_layout Labeling
11382 \labelwidthstring MMM
11383 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11392 \begin_layout Labeling
11393 \labelwidthstring MMM
11394 #2-a This is level #2.
11395 We created it by using
11398 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11404 arg "depth-increment"
11411 \begin_layout Labeling
11412 \labelwidthstring MMM
11413 #3-a This is level #3.
11423 arg "depth-increment"
11427 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11431 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11437 arg "depth-increment"
11444 \begin_layout Standard
11451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11461 We did this by entering
11464 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11471 arg "depth-increment"
11475 then changing the paragraph environment to
11480 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11481 it also works for the
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11514 \begin_layout Labeling
11515 \labelwidthstring MMM
11516 #4-a This is level #4.
11520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11523 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11529 we can't nest anything inside a
11534 which is why we're still at level #4.
11540 keep nesting things inside
11541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11552 \begin_layout Labeling
11553 \labelwidthstring MMM
11554 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11559 \begin_layout Labeling
11560 \labelwidthstring MMM
11561 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11562 and this is level #6.
11564 you should know how we made these two.
11568 \begin_layout Labeling
11569 \labelwidthstring MMM
11570 #5-b Back to level #5.
11574 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11580 arg "depth-decrement"
11587 \begin_layout Labeling
11588 \labelwidthstring MMM
11592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11598 arg "depth-decrement"
11602 we're back at level #4.
11606 \begin_layout Labeling
11607 \labelwidthstring MMM
11608 #3-b Back to level #3.
11609 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11613 \begin_layout Labeling
11614 \labelwidthstring MMM
11615 #2-b Back to level #2.
11619 \begin_layout Labeling
11620 \labelwidthstring MMM
11622 back to the outermost level,
11624 After this sentence,
11629 and change the paragraph environment back to
11636 \begin_layout Standard
11637 We could have also used the
11656 environment in place of the
11661 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11669 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11670 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11675 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11685 arg "depth-increment"
11690 \begin_inset Newline newline
11694 we will change to the
11702 \begin_layout Enumerate
11711 \begin_layout Enumerate
11712 Notice how the nested
11716 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11721 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11726 We ended this example by entering
11732 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11736 and reset the nesting depth by using
11739 arg "depth-decrement"
11745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11758 \begin_inset Argument 1
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 Levels and other list environments
11772 \begin_layout Enumerate
11778 paragraph environment.
11779 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11783 \begin_layout Enumerate
11788 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11794 arg "depth-increment"
11799 what happens if we nest an
11803 environment inside of this one?
11804 It will be at level #3,
11805 but what will its label be?
11810 \begin_layout Itemize
11822 even though it's at level #3.
11824 its label is a bullet.
11825 (We got here by using
11828 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11835 arg "depth-increment"
11839 then changing the environment to
11847 \begin_layout Itemize
11852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11859 arg "depth-increment"
11863 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11868 \begin_layout Enumerate
11870 to get to level #5.
11873 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11878 Notice the type of numbering,
11884 because we are in the
11892 environment (that is,
11908 \begin_layout Enumerate
11913 change the paragraph environment,
11914 but decrease the nesting depth?
11915 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11919 \begin_layout Enumerate
11921 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11925 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11928 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11931 \begin_layout Enumerate
11935 arg "depth-decrement"
11938 to decrease the depth after the next
11941 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11948 \begin_layout Enumerate
11950 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11955 \begin_layout Enumerate
11957 Even though we've changed levels,
11959 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11962 \begin_layout Enumerate
11964 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11976 that \SpecialChar LyX
11981 reset the counter for the label.
11985 \begin_layout Enumerate
11989 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11995 arg "depth-decrement"
11999 and we're back to level #2.
12001 we not only changed the nesting depth,
12002 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
12010 \begin_layout Enumerate
12011 The same thing happens if we do another
12014 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12020 arg "depth-decrement"
12023 sequence and return to level #1,
12024 the outermost level.
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12029 we reset the environment to
12035 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
12045 The number of other
12049 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
12055 The same rule applies for the
12063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12068 \begin_layout Enumerate
12069 We're going to go totally nuts now.
12070 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
12071 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
12081 \begin_layout Standard
12090 arg "depth-increment"
12099 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
12101 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
12102 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
12103 Either before or after this,
12104 we will put in the level.
12108 \begin_layout Enumerate
12115 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
12119 \begin_layout Verse
12120 Now we will add verse.
12121 \begin_inset Newline newline
12124 It will get much worse.
12125 \begin_inset Newline newline
12136 arg "depth-increment"
12148 \begin_layout Verse
12151 \begin_inset Newline newline
12154 Bippitey boppitey boo!
12155 \begin_inset Newline newline
12161 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12169 \begin_layout Verse
12170 Here comes a table:
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12175 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12183 \begin_inset Tabular
12184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
12185 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
12192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
12230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12272 \begin_layout Verse
12276 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12288 arg "depth-increment"
12295 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12302 \begin_inset Newline newline
12310 arg "depth-decrement"
12317 \begin_layout Enumerate
12324 level #1) This is another item.
12325 Note that selecting a
12329 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
12330 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
12337 \begin_layout Quotation
12338 We're now ending the
12342 list and changing to
12347 We're still at level #1.
12348 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
12349 The next set of paragraphs is a
12350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12357 We will nest both the
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12369 environments inside of this one,
12370 then use another nested
12374 for the letter body.
12378 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12381 to preserve the depth.
12382 Remember that you need to use
12385 arg "newline-insert newline"
12388 to create multiple lines inside the
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12405 \begin_layout Right Address
12407 \begin_inset Newline newline
12412 \begin_inset Newline newline
12418 \begin_layout Address
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12426 \begin_layout Quotation
12427 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12431 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12433 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12434 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12435 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12437 we thank you for your patience.
12440 \begin_layout Quotation
12443 now have a special on beef.
12444 If you are interested,
12445 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12446 along with payment.
12449 \begin_layout Quotation
12450 We thank you again for your patience.
12453 \begin_layout Address
12455 \begin_inset Newline newline
12462 \begin_layout Quotation
12463 That ends that example!
12466 \begin_layout Standard
12468 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12469 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12470 We could have easily nested an
12492 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12495 \begin_layout Subsection
12497 \begin_inset Index idx
12502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12504 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12521 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12528 \begin_layout Standard
12529 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12530 For example you need two different enumerations:
12533 \begin_layout Enumerate
12538 \begin_layout Enumerate
12543 \begin_layout Enumerate
12547 \begin_layout Standard
12548 \begin_inset Separator plain
12554 \begin_layout Itemize
12560 \begin_layout Standard
12561 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12567 \begin_layout Enumerate
12571 \begin_layout Enumerate
12575 \begin_layout Enumerate
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 To split an existing list into two lists,
12581 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12584 Separated <Name> Above
12588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12589 Separated <Name> Below
12592 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12593 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12594 Inside nested environments,
12595 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12600 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12603 \begin_layout Standard
12605 you get an environment separator when you press
12608 arg "paragraph-break"
12615 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12618 \begin_layout Section
12620 Pagination and Line Breaks
12621 \begin_inset Index idx
12626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12635 \begin_layout Standard
12637 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12639 offers you more spaces:
12640 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12641 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12644 \begin_layout Subsection
12646 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12648 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12654 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12659 \begin_inset Index idx
12664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12666 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12671 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12673 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12691 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12693 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12697 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12698 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12700 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12703 break the line at that point.
12704 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12708 \begin_layout Quote
12709 Further documentation is given in section
12710 \begin_inset Newline newline
12714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12716 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12724 \begin_layout Standard
12726 it would be a good thing to put a
12727 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12729 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12747 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12758 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12760 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12770 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12782 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12788 \begin_layout Subsection
12790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12792 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12797 \begin_inset Index idx
12802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12804 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12821 \begin_layout Standard
12822 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12825 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12829 The length units are listed in Appendix
12830 \begin_inset space ~
12834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12836 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12846 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12848 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12852 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12856 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12861 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12865 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12872 \begin_inset Index idx
12877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12879 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12884 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12886 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12902 \begin_layout Standard
12903 With the introduction of typewriters,
12904 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12905 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12906 automatically takes care about this.
12908 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12916 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12922 To insert a normal space,
12925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12926 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12928 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12930 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12942 arg "space-insert normal"
12948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12950 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12956 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12961 \begin_inset Index idx
12966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12985 \begin_layout Standard
12987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12991 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12998 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13003 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
13005 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
13009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13013 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
13015 inside abbreviations:
13018 \begin_layout Quote
13020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13024 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
13027 \begin_layout Standard
13028 or between values and units.
13029 Compare for example this:
13030 \begin_inset Newline newline
13034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13038 \begin_inset Newline newline
13041 10 kg (normal space
13042 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
13048 \begin_layout Standard
13049 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
13051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13052 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13054 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
13056 \begin_inset space ~
13062 \begin_inset space ~
13070 arg "space-insert thin"
13076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13080 \begin_layout Standard
13081 You can also insert the following space types:
13084 \begin_layout Description
13086 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
13088 \begin_inset space ~
13094 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13098 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
13102 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13106 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
13108 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
13111 space between the arrows.
13112 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
13116 \begin_layout Description
13118 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
13120 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13127 space A line with a
13128 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13132 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
13136 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13140 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
13142 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
13145 space between the arrows.
13148 \begin_layout Description
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13157 space A line with a
13158 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13162 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
13166 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13169 negative thin space between the arrows.
13172 \begin_layout Description
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13181 space A line with a
13182 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13186 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
13190 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13193 negative medium space between the arrows.
13196 \begin_layout Description
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13205 space A line with a
13206 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13210 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
13214 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13217 negative thick space between the arrows.
13220 \begin_layout Description
13222 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
13224 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
13226 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13240 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13244 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
13248 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13252 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
13254 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
13256 \begin_inset space ~
13262 \begin_inset space ~
13266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13269 em) space between the arrows.
13272 \begin_layout Description
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13282 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13286 \begin_inset space \quad{}
13290 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13294 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
13296 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13307 em) space between the arrows.
13310 \begin_layout Description
13312 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
13314 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13322 \begin_inset space ~
13326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13330 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13334 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
13338 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13342 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
13344 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
13346 \begin_inset space ~
13350 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
13354 \begin_inset space ~
13358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13361 em) space between the arrows.
13364 \begin_layout Description
13366 \begin_inset space ~
13370 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13374 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
13379 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13386 cm space between the arrows.
13389 \begin_layout Standard
13391 \begin_inset space ~
13395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13397 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13402 lists the different space sizes.
13405 \begin_layout Standard
13406 \begin_inset Float table
13413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13414 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13419 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13423 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13433 \begin_inset Tabular
13434 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13435 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13436 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13437 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13450 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13487 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13492 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13494 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13495 Non-breaking Normal
13502 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13526 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13535 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13537 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13552 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13558 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13564 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13569 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13580 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13586 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13597 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13623 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13629 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13645 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13693 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13698 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13700 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13704 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13706 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13723 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13725 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13733 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13735 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13779 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13784 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13786 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13826 \begin_inset Index idx
13831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13850 \begin_layout Standard
13851 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13852 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13854 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13857 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13858 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13859 If there is more than one H
13860 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13864 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13867 \begin_layout Standard
13868 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13871 \begin_layout Quote
13873 This is on the left side
13874 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13877 This is on the right
13880 \begin_layout Quote
13883 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13887 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13893 \begin_layout Quote
13896 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13900 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13911 That was an example in the
13917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13921 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13928 is one in a standard paragraph.
13929 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13934 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13937 \begin_layout Standard
13939 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13941 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13944 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13947 \begin_inset space ~
13952 s in the space dialog:
13953 The following patterns are available:
13956 \begin_layout Standard
13959 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13963 \begin_inset space ~
13969 \begin_layout Standard
13972 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13976 \begin_inset space ~
13982 \begin_layout Standard
13985 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13989 \begin_inset space ~
13995 \begin_layout Standard
13998 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
14002 \begin_inset space ~
14008 \begin_layout Standard
14010 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
14012 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
14016 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
14017 (= opened downwards)
14021 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
14025 \begin_inset space ~
14031 \begin_layout Standard
14033 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
14035 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
14039 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
14044 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
14048 \begin_inset space ~
14054 \begin_layout Standard
14055 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14065 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
14067 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
14070 is at the beginning of a line,
14075 in the first line in a paragraph,
14079 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
14081 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
14084 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
14085 If you need space in this case anyway,
14087 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
14091 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
14096 option in the space dialog.
14104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14108 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14113 \begin_inset Index idx
14118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14120 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14137 \begin_layout Standard
14138 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
14140 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
14143 \begin_layout Standard
14144 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14147 What is correct English?:
14148 \begin_inset Newline newline
14152 \begin_inset Newline newline
14156 \begin_inset space ~
14159 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
14160 \begin_inset Newline newline
14164 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14175 \begin_inset Newline newline
14179 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14190 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14196 \begin_layout Standard
14198 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14203 \begin_inset space ~
14207 \begin_inset space ~
14211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14216 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
14218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14219 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14223 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
14224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14228 \begin_inset space ~
14232 \begin_inset space ~
14236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14239 into the phantom inset (note the space after
14240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14248 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
14249 That is why it is named
14250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14258 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
14259 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
14262 \begin_layout Subsection
14264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14266 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
14271 \begin_inset Index idx
14276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14278 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14295 \begin_layout Standard
14296 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
14299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14300 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14302 \begin_inset space ~
14308 There you find the following sizes:
14311 \begin_layout Standard
14315 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
14324 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
14332 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
14337 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
14338 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
14342 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
14347 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
14349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14350 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14352 \begin_inset space ~
14358 \begin_inset Index idx
14363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14379 for the paragraph separation.
14380 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
14383 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14391 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14397 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14401 \begin_layout Standard
14403 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14412 equal to the height,
14413 or half the height,
14414 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14419 \begin_layout Standard
14423 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14429 \begin_inset Index idx
14434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14436 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14450 is a variable space,
14451 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14453 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14458 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14459 because the space between them is then maximal.
14463 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14471 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14477 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14485 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14490 s are described in section
14491 \begin_inset space ~
14495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14497 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14507 If there are several
14510 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14516 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14517 You can therefore use
14520 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14525 s to center text on a page,
14526 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14529 \begin_layout Standard
14534 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14535 \begin_inset space ~
14539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14541 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14549 \begin_layout Standard
14550 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14561 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14562 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14574 \begin_layout Subsection
14575 Paragraph Alignment
14576 \begin_inset Index idx
14581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14600 \begin_layout Standard
14601 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14606 dialog (toolbar button
14609 arg "layout-paragraph"
14613 There are five possibilities:
14616 \begin_layout Itemize
14624 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14630 \begin_layout Itemize
14638 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14644 \begin_layout Itemize
14652 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14658 \begin_layout Itemize
14666 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14672 \begin_layout Itemize
14680 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14686 \begin_layout Standard
14687 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14688 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14689 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14690 and look like this:
14693 \begin_layout Standard
14695 This paragraph is right aligned,
14698 \begin_layout Standard
14700 this one is centered,
14703 \begin_layout Standard
14705 this one is left aligned.
14708 \begin_layout Subsection
14710 \begin_inset Index idx
14715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14717 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14734 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14741 \begin_layout Standard
14742 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14743 does the page breaks in your document,
14744 you can force a page break where you want one.
14745 Normally this will not be necessary,
14746 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14747 is good at page breaking.
14748 Only if you use a lot of
14754 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14757 \begin_layout Standard
14758 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14762 have to change the page breaking.
14765 \begin_layout Standard
14766 There are two types of page breaks:
14767 One that ends the page without any special action.
14768 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14780 that is inserted via the menu
14782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14783 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14791 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14792 so that it fills out the complete page.
14793 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14796 \begin_layout Standard
14797 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14800 the wrong way to do it.
14802 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14803 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14807 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14812 to learn more about
14819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14823 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14828 \begin_inset Index idx
14833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14835 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14854 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14855 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14856 including unprocessed floats,
14857 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14858 if necessary by adding pages.
14861 \begin_layout Standard
14862 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14865 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14873 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14874 you can use the menu
14876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14879 \begin_inset space ~
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14888 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14889 if necessary by adding a page.
14890 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14896 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14897 Suppressing Page Breaks
14900 \begin_inset Index idx
14905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14907 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14911 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14926 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14930 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14935 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14939 \begin_layout Standard
14941 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14942 To discourage page break at
14943 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14945 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14946 certain point you can use
14950 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14952 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14955 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14957 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14964 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14965 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14970 \begin_layout Subsection
14972 \begin_inset Index idx
14977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14986 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14993 \begin_layout Standard
14994 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14995 one simply breaks the line.
14996 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14999 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15001 \begin_inset space ~
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15013 arg "newline-insert newline"
15017 Another type that is inserted via the menu
15019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15020 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15022 \begin_inset space ~
15026 \begin_inset space ~
15034 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
15037 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
15038 This is useful to avoid
15039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15046 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
15049 \begin_layout Standard
15050 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
15052 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
15053 is very good at line breaking.
15056 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
15058 in a poem or for an address (see sections
15059 \begin_inset space ~
15063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15065 reference "sec:Quote"
15072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15074 reference "sec:Verse"
15080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15082 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
15090 \begin_layout Subsection
15092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15094 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
15099 \begin_inset Index idx
15104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15113 \begin_layout Standard
15115 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15126 \begin_layout Standard
15130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15131 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15133 \begin_inset space ~
15138 you can insert horizontal lines.
15139 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
15140 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
15143 \begin_layout Standard
15145 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15156 \begin_layout Section
15157 Characters and Symbols
15160 \begin_layout Standard
15161 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
15162 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
15164 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
15166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15172 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
15177 for information on how this is done.
15180 \begin_layout Standard
15181 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
15186 dialog via the menu
15188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15189 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15205 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
15207 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
15215 \begin_layout Section
15216 Fonts and Text Styles
15217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15219 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
15226 \begin_layout Subsection
15228 \begin_inset Index idx
15233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15235 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15252 \begin_layout Standard
15253 There are two types of fonts:
15256 \begin_layout Description
15258 \begin_inset space ~
15262 \begin_inset Index idx
15267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15269 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15283 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
15284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15288 characters) in the font.
15289 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
15290 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
15291 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
15292 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
15293 \begin_inset Newline newline
15296 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
15297 But to achieve a better quality,
15298 many fonts define several font sizes.
15299 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
15300 \begin_inset Newline newline
15316 \begin_inset space ~
15324 \begin_layout Description
15326 \begin_inset space ~
15330 \begin_inset Index idx
15335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15337 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15352 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
15353 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
15355 they don't scale well,
15356 because in order to scale a glyph,
15357 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
15358 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
15359 In order to mitigate this effect,
15360 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15364 pixels high up to 34
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15368 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
15369 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
15370 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
15371 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
15373 \begin_inset Newline newline
15376 Bitmap fonts are named
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15384 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
15387 \begin_layout Standard
15388 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15389 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15390 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15391 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15394 \begin_layout Standard
15395 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15396 look at its document properties.
15399 \begin_layout Standard
15400 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15401 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15403 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15406 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15408 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15409 to emphasize text you use an
15410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15418 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15420 In \SpecialChar LyX
15422 you do things based on contexts,
15423 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15426 \begin_layout Subsection
15429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15431 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15438 \begin_layout Standard
15441 used its own fonts.
15443 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15444 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15446 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15447 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15448 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15449 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15450 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15451 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15452 files are very portable across different machines.
15454 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15455 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15456 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15458 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15459 \begin_inset space ~
15463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15465 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15471 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15472 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15475 \begin_layout Standard
15476 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15477 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15478 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15479 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15481 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15484 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15485 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15488 \begin_layout Standard
15489 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15499 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15501 or other font deficiencies;
15502 so you might have to experiment.
15510 \begin_layout Subsection
15511 Document Font and Font size
15512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15514 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15519 \begin_inset Index idx
15524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15526 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15541 \begin_inset Index idx
15546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15548 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15565 \begin_layout Standard
15566 You can set the document fonts in the
15568 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15572 \begin_inset Index idx
15577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15579 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15598 section of the dialog,
15599 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15604 \begin_inset space ~
15614 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15615 \begin_inset space ~
15618 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15621 \begin_layout Standard
15627 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15628 This requires that you use
15641 as the output format,
15643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15647 \begin_inset space \space{}
15650 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15651 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15652 installed (see section
15653 \begin_inset space ~
15657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15659 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15665 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15667 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15668 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15670 \begin_inset space ~
15675 since \SpecialChar LyX
15676 cannot determine the family.
15677 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15678 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15681 cannot determine this in advance,
15682 so you might need to experiment.
15685 \begin_layout Standard
15686 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15687 fonts (which is the default),
15688 the possible options for the font include
15692 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15699 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15701 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15703 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15708 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15710 depending on the document language,
15714 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15715 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 \begin_inset space ~
15729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15739 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15740 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15748 \begin_inset space ~
15754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15762 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15784 European Computer Modern
15787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15796 some classes set different default fonts.
15799 \begin_layout Standard
15805 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15806 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15811 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15814 \begin_inset space ~
15819 version 6 or later,
15820 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15825 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15826 you have to use a vector font.
15827 Depending on how your document should look,
15831 \begin_layout Itemize
15835 \begin_inset space ~
15841 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15853 \begin_inset space ~
15858 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15859 community in order to replace
15863 as the default font.
15864 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15865 Except for some details,
15866 where the appearance was improved,
15870 \begin_inset space ~
15883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15884 One difference is improved kerning.
15892 \begin_layout Itemize
15893 If you do not like the look of
15902 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15908 \begin_inset space ~
15914 \begin_inset space ~
15924 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15925 \begin_inset space ~
15928 serif and typewriter fonts,
15932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15933 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15941 \begin_inset space ~
15950 for sans serif text),
15951 or different shapes of the same font,
15953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15957 \begin_inset space \space{}
15965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15969 \begin_inset space \space{}
15975 \begin_inset space ~
15983 \begin_inset space ~
15993 but you can also select your own.
15994 \begin_inset Newline newline
15997 The differences between roman,
16001 \begin_inset space ~
16010 fonts are explained in section
16011 \begin_inset space ~
16015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16017 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16023 \begin_inset Newline newline
16029 \begin_inset space ~
16034 was originally designed for newspapers.
16035 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
16039 \begin_inset space ~
16044 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
16047 \begin_layout Standard
16048 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
16064 Some classes provide additional sizes.
16069 depends on the class you are using.
16070 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
16073 \begin_layout Standard
16074 Note that the font size is the
16079 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
16080 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
16082 and subscripts) by this value.
16083 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
16086 \begin_inset space ~
16092 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
16093 \begin_inset space ~
16097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16099 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16107 \begin_layout Standard
16111 \begin_inset space ~
16116 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
16118 \begin_inset space ~
16121 serif or typewriter.
16126 selection uses what is preset by the class,
16127 the other selections override this.
16138 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
16141 \begin_layout Standard
16146 LaTeX font encoding
16148 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16154 \begin_inset Index idx
16159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16162 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16177 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
16179 \begin_inset space ~
16183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16185 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
16194 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
16195 Unless you have specific reasons,
16197 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
16201 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
16209 \begin_layout Standard
16213 Use Old Style Figures
16217 Use True Small Caps
16220 These are extra features some fonts provide.
16223 Use Old Style Figures
16226 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
16227 Old style figures are the numerals (0
16228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16235 9) with ascenders and descenders,
16236 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
16239 Use True Small Caps
16241 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
16242 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
16243 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
16244 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
16248 \begin_layout Standard
16250 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
16253 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
16258 if you use non-TeX fonts),
16264 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
16270 \begin_layout Standard
16275 allows users of the languages Chinese,
16277 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16282 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16288 \begin_inset Index idx
16293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16310 So this has no effect for the document language
16326 \begin_layout Standard
16329 Enable micro-typographic extensions
16331 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16337 \begin_inset Index idx
16342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16345 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16363 \begin_layout Standard
16366 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16368 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
16372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16373 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16375 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16381 instead of ligatures (--,
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16389 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16400 \begin_layout Standard
16401 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16405 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16414 When you choose a new font or font size,
16420 change the screen font!
16421 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16422 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16424 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16426 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16431 \begin_inset space ~
16435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16437 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16450 \begin_layout Subsection
16454 \begin_layout Standard
16455 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16456 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16457 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16458 fonts for your document,
16459 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16465 \begin_inset Index idx
16470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16472 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16487 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16488 automatically selects a math font.
16489 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16490 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16491 's default font family
16492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16498 \begin_inset space ~
16504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16509 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16512 \begin_layout Standard
16513 Note that the math font will not be used for
16517 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16523 or by the insertion of the command
16530 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16531 \begin_inset space ~
16535 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16537 \begin_inset space ~
16540 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16543 \begin_inset space ~
16551 \begin_inset space ~
16556 in the document font settings.
16559 \begin_layout Standard
16560 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16561 fonts for the document,
16562 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16563 font (in most cases
16564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16570 \begin_inset space ~
16576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16579 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16580 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16587 \begin_inset space ~
16593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16599 \begin_layout Subsection
16601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16611 name "subsec:charstyles"
16618 \begin_inset Index idx
16623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16630 \begin_inset Index idx
16635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16644 \begin_layout Standard
16645 As we've already seen,
16647 automatically changes the
16648 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16651 style for certain paragraph environments.
16653 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16655 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16656 This is where we meet the concept of
16662 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16664 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16668 \begin_layout Standard
16670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16676 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16692 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16703 available with all document classes.
16705 some document classes and modules provide
16709 for specific purposes.
16710 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16713 \begin_layout Standard
16715 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16718 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16727 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16732 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16733 you selected it and chose e.
16734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16755 encourage the use of
16767 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16769 \begin_inset space ~
16773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16775 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16781 Rather than fiddling with
16786 they encourage the use of
16791 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16797 \begin_inset Quotes els
16801 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16806 \begin_inset Quotes els
16810 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16814 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16816 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16817 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16818 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16819 On a more practical level,
16820 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16821 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16826 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16833 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16834 With a semantic markup (such as
16840 you'd just need to change the definition of
16845 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16848 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16849 using different markup semantics.
16852 \begin_layout Standard
16854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16856 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16862 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16865 Builtin Text Styles
16866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16868 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16875 \begin_layout Standard
16877 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16878 The two builtin text styles can be
16879 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16887 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16888 both of these styles
16891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16895 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16897 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16906 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16914 \begin_layout Standard
16920 do one of the following:
16923 \begin_layout Itemize
16924 click on the toolbar button
16933 \begin_layout Itemize
16934 use the key binding
16941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16945 \begin_layout Itemize
16947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16951 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16953 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16955 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16963 arg "dialog-show character"
16967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16971 arg "dialog-show character"
16975 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16976 as described in section
16977 \begin_inset space ~
16981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16983 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16989 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
16999 \begin_layout Standard
17001 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
17003 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
17007 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
17011 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
17013 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
17017 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
17026 style is already active,
17027 they deactivate it.
17030 \begin_layout Standard
17031 One typically uses the
17035 style for proper names.
17038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17045 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
17047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
17055 \begin_layout Standard
17057 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
17063 is producing text in
17068 but the definition can be changed.
17073 \begin_layout Standard
17075 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
17077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
17085 You can activate (or deactivate —
17086 it's also a toggle) the
17093 \begin_layout Itemize
17094 clicking on the toolbar button
17103 \begin_layout Itemize
17104 using the keybindings
17111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
17115 \begin_layout Itemize
17117 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17121 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
17123 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
17125 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17133 arg "dialog-show character"
17137 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17141 arg "dialog-show character"
17145 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
17146 as described in section
17147 \begin_inset space ~
17151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17153 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17159 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
17169 \begin_layout Standard
17174 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
17176 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
17178 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
17181 packages use a different font
17182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
17184 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17190 \begin_layout Standard
17191 We've been using the
17195 style all over the place in this document.
17196 Here's one more example:
17199 \begin_layout Quotation
17203 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
17205 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
17211 \begin_layout Standard
17212 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
17213 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
17214 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
17215 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
17216 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
17218 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
17223 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
17225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
17229 \begin_layout Standard
17231 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
17232 In contrast to the custom text styles,
17233 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
17241 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
17244 always reset to the default font using the key binding
17251 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
17253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
17257 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
17260 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17262 \begin_inset space ~
17265 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17267 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17277 arg "dialog-show character"
17283 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17285 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
17291 arg "dialog-show character"
17295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17301 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
17303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17305 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
17312 \begin_layout Standard
17314 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
17315 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
17316 a module (see section
17317 \begin_inset space ~
17321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17323 reference "subsec:Modules"
17332 or local layout settings (see section
17333 \begin_inset space ~
17337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17339 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
17345 As the two builtin styles,
17350 markup for specific functions.
17357 module that provides,
17358 among other things,
17359 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
17371 \begin_inset Quotes els
17375 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17381 \begin_layout Standard
17383 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17384 These styles can be found,
17388 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17390 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17392 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17398 \begin_layout Standard
17400 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17401 For the purpose of demonstration,
17402 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17406 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17407 By example of the emphasized style,
17408 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17413 appears as normal font change,
17414 the custom text style
17415 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17428 appears as an inset,
17429 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17430 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17432 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17434 \begin_inset Flex Code
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17439 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17449 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17454 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17464 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17469 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17478 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17483 \begin_layout Subsection
17485 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17487 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17497 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17505 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17507 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17513 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17518 \begin_inset Index idx
17523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17532 \begin_layout Standard
17533 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17534 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17538 so \SpecialChar LyX
17540 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17542 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17546 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17547 the properties of text passages
17548 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17553 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17555 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17556 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17560 \begin_layout Standard
17562 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17563 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17565 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17566 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17571 comes in as a last resort.
17576 \begin_layout Standard
17577 Before we document how to
17578 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17579 use custom character style
17580 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17581 tweak the text properties
17584 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17588 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17593 \begin_inset Newline newline
17596 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17599 \begin_layout Standard
17601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17602 use custom character styles
17603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17604 tweak text properties
17608 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17611 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17613 \begin_inset space ~
17616 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17624 arg "dialog-show character"
17627 dialog or press the toolbar button
17630 arg "dialog-show character"
17635 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17638 boxes in this dialog,
17639 each corresponding to a different
17640 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17642 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17645 property that you can choose.
17646 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17650 \begin_inset space ~
17656 which keeps the current state of that property.
17658 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17662 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17664 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17669 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17670 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17673 \begin_layout Standard
17675 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17677 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17681 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17683 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17687 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17689 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17695 and their options (in addition to
17698 \begin_inset space ~
17704 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17708 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17716 \begin_layout Labeling
17717 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17731 The possible options are:
17735 \begin_layout Labeling
17736 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17741 This is the Roman font family.
17742 Normally a serif font.
17743 It's also the default family.
17753 \begin_layout Labeling
17754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17758 \begin_inset space ~
17765 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17777 \begin_layout Labeling
17778 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17785 This is the Typewriter font family.
17791 arg "font-typewriter"
17797 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17801 \begin_layout Standard
17803 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17804 The general differences of these families are:
17807 \begin_layout Itemize
17809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17814 fonts use characters with serifs.
17815 These are the small
17816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17823 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17824 The following example shows the difference:
17825 \begin_inset Newline newline
17829 \begin_inset Newline newline
17834 text without serifs
17837 \begin_inset Newline newline
17840 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17841 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17848 \begin_layout Itemize
17850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17855 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17856 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17857 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17860 \begin_layout Itemize
17862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17876 which means every character has the same width;
17878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17895 \begin_inset Newline newline
17899 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17904 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17917 \begin_inset Note Note
17920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17922 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17923 For more on phantoms see section
17924 \begin_inset space ~
17928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17930 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17941 \begin_inset Newline newline
17950 \begin_layout Labeling
17951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17956 This corresponds to the print weight.
17961 \begin_layout Labeling
17962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17967 This is the Medium font series.
17968 It's also the default series.
17971 \begin_layout Labeling
17972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17979 This is the Bold font series.
17992 \begin_layout Labeling
17993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17998 As the name implies.
18003 \begin_layout Labeling
18004 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18009 This is the Upright font shape.
18010 It's also the default shape.
18013 \begin_layout Labeling
18014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
18029 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
18034 s the Italic font shape
18040 \begin_layout Labeling
18041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18048 This is the Slanted font shape
18050 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18052 this is different from italic).
18055 \begin_layout Labeling
18056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18060 \begin_inset space ~
18067 This is the Small caps font shape
18074 \begin_layout Labeling
18075 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18077 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18082 Alters the text color.
18083 Note that not all DVI
18084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
18086 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18087 viewers are able to display colors.
18091 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
18093 \begin_inset space ~
18097 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18101 which means that the document default color set in
18103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18104 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18110 \begin_inset space ~
18117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
18119 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18121 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
18123 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18218 \begin_inset Index idx
18223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
18246 \begin_layout Labeling
18247 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18249 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18254 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18255 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18256 workarea in blue to indicate the change
18257 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
18258 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
18260 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18262 \begin_inset Newline newline
18265 If you have for example,
18266 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18268 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18269 When using the spell checking (see section
18270 \begin_inset space ~
18274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18276 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18281 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18282 \begin_inset Newline newline
18285 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18288 Exclude from Spellchecking
18291 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18292 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
18296 \begin_layout Labeling
18297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18302 Alters the size of the font.
18304 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
18306 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
18310 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
18313 numerical values here;
18314 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
18316 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
18318 but a general description of what you want to do.
18323 \begin_layout Labeling
18324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18345 arg "font-size tiny"
18351 \begin_layout Labeling
18352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18373 arg "font-size scriptsize"
18379 \begin_layout Labeling
18380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18401 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18407 \begin_layout Labeling
18408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18429 arg "font-size small"
18435 \begin_layout Labeling
18436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18450 It's also the default size.
18454 arg "font-size normal"
18460 \begin_layout Labeling
18461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18482 arg "font-size large"
18488 \begin_layout Labeling
18489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18510 arg "font-size larger"
18516 \begin_layout Labeling
18517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18538 arg "font-size largest"
18544 \begin_layout Labeling
18545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18566 arg "font-size huge"
18572 \begin_layout Labeling
18573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18594 arg "font-size giant"
18600 \begin_layout Labeling
18601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18606 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18627 arg "font-size increase"
18633 \begin_layout Labeling
18634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18639 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18660 arg "font-size decrease"
18666 \begin_layout Standard
18672 don't go crazy with this feature.
18673 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18675 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18677 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18678 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18683 \begin_layout Standard
18685 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18686 Another combo box allows to tweak
18693 \begin_layout Labeling
18694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18696 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18701 Alters the text color.
18702 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18708 which means that the document default color set in
18710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18711 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18717 \begin_inset space ~
18817 \begin_inset Index idx
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18824 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18828 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18851 \begin_layout Labeling
18852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18854 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18864 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18865 change a few other things at the character level
18866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18867 have text passages being underlined
18871 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18872 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18873 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18874 when you could not change fonts.
18875 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18876 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18877 because some people
18881 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18888 \begin_layout Labeling
18889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18891 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18898 This is text with emphasize on
18901 This might seem like the same as
18906 but it is actually a bit different.
18912 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18913 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18914 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18918 \begin_layout Labeling
18919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18921 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18926 Don't use underlining.
18931 \begin_layout Labeling
18932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18934 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18938 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18948 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18957 arg "font-underline"
18963 \begin_inset Newline newline
18967 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18970 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18971 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18972 when you could not change fonts.
18973 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18974 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18975 because some people
18979 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18984 \begin_layout Labeling
18985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18989 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18991 \begin_inset space ~
19000 This is text with Double under
19001 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
19003 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
19012 arg "font-underunderline"
19016 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
19018 \begin_inset Newline newline
19021 As we just warned you against using underbar,
19022 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
19027 \begin_layout Labeling
19028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19032 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
19034 \begin_inset space ~
19043 This is text with Wavy under
19044 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
19046 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
19055 arg "font-underwave"
19059 \begin_inset Newline newline
19062 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
19063 Keep antinausea pills handy.
19064 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
19069 \begin_layout Labeling
19070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
19077 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
19083 \begin_layout Labeling
19084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
19091 Don't use strikethrough.
19094 \begin_layout Labeling
19095 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19099 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
19101 \begin_inset space ~
19105 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
19113 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
19115 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
19116 Single strikethrough
19124 arg "font-strikeout"
19128 \begin_inset Newline newline
19131 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
19134 \begin_layout Labeling
19135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19137 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
19147 \begin_inset space ~
19151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
19159 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
19161 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
19167 \begin_inset Newline newline
19170 This is used to make text hardly readable.
19174 \begin_layout Standard
19176 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
19177 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
19180 \begin_layout Labeling
19181 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19183 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
19188 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
19189 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
19190 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
19191 \begin_inset Newline newline
19194 If you have for example,
19195 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
19197 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
19198 When using the spell checking (see section
19199 \begin_inset space ~
19203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19205 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
19210 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
19211 \begin_inset Newline newline
19214 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
19217 Exclude from Spellchecking
19220 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
19223 \begin_layout Standard
19225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19226 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
19227 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
19228 \begin_inset space ~
19232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19234 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
19240 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
19244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19250 \begin_layout Itemize
19252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
19260 This is text with emphasize on
19265 \begin_layout Itemize
19269 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
19277 This is text with Noun on.
19279 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
19287 this is a logical attribute.
19288 Normally it's equivalent to
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19301 \begin_layout Standard
19302 So you have a huge number of combinations to
19303 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
19305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
19310 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
19311 chosen a new character style
19312 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
19313 applied a text property
19316 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
19319 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
19321 \begin_inset space ~
19324 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
19332 arg "dialog-show character"
19338 arg "dialog-show character"
19343 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
19347 You can activate the
19348 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
19350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
19351 last applied properties
19353 by using the toolbar button
19356 arg "textstyle-apply"
19360 The button lets you apply
19361 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
19362 your custom character style
19363 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
19366 even when the dialog isn't visible.
19368 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
19369 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
19370 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
19371 20) most recently applied settings,
19372 from which you can select one.
19377 \begin_layout Standard
19378 To completely reset the
19379 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
19381 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
19382 text properties of a selection
19386 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
19388 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19398 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19403 from the menu of the toolbar button
19406 arg "textstyle-apply"
19413 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19414 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19434 \begin_inset space ~
19448 \begin_layout Standard
19450 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19451 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19459 \begin_inset space ~
19472 \begin_layout Itemize
19474 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19488 which means every character has the same width;
19490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19507 \begin_inset Newline newline
19511 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 \begin_inset Note Note
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 For more on phantoms see section
19530 \begin_inset space ~
19534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19536 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19547 \begin_inset Newline newline
19553 \begin_layout Itemize
19555 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19560 fonts use characters with serifs.
19561 These are the small
19562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19569 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19570 The following example shows the difference:
19571 \begin_inset Newline newline
19575 \begin_inset Newline newline
19580 text without serifs
19583 \begin_inset Newline newline
19586 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19587 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19594 \begin_layout Itemize
19596 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19601 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19602 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19603 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19608 \begin_layout Standard
19610 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19618 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19619 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19622 \begin_inset space ~
19628 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19631 apply a style with properties A,
19632 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19635 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19636 the text ends up with properties A,
19640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19655 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19656 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19665 toggling behavior is up to you.
19669 \begin_inset space ~
19675 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19709 \begin_inset space ~
19715 then apply the style to bold face text,
19716 the text will revert to the default series (
19717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19725 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19730 \begin_layout Standard
19732 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19735 with the same warning once again:
19736 Do not overuse the fonts!
19738 more often than not,
19739 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19742 \begin_layout Section
19743 Printing and Previewing
19746 \begin_layout Subsection
19750 \begin_layout Standard
19751 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19753 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19754 Before we tell you that,
19755 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19756 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19758 Additional Features
19763 \begin_layout Standard
19765 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19768 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19769 typesetting system,
19770 but to prevent confusion,
19771 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19774 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19777 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19778 to turn your writing into printable output.
19779 This happens in two stages:
19782 \begin_layout Enumerate
19785 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19787 generating a file with the extension,
19789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19803 \begin_layout Enumerate
19806 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19807 to use the commands in the
19811 file to produce printable output.
19814 \begin_layout Subsection
19815 Output file formats
19816 \begin_inset Index idx
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19830 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19839 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19841 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19845 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19849 \begin_inset Index idx
19854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19856 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19863 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19879 \begin_layout Standard
19880 This file type has the extension
19881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19893 It contains your document as plain text
19894 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19896 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19897 following the rules of the
19898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19901 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19910 \begin_layout Standard
19911 You can export your document to
19912 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19914 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19919 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19920 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19922 \begin_inset space ~
19929 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19930 bibliography (section
19931 \begin_inset space ~
19935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19937 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19943 If your document includes such material,
19946 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19947 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19949 \begin_inset space ~
19953 \begin_inset space ~
19957 \begin_inset space ~
19965 \begin_inset space ~
19969 \begin_inset space ~
19975 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19976 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19978 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19987 \begin_inset Index idx
19992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 \begin_layout Standard
20013 This file type has the extension
20014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20025 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20026 program to process your document.
20027 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
20029 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
20030 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
20031 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
20032 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
20033 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
20036 \begin_layout Standard
20037 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20038 -file using the menu
20040 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20041 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20045 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
20046 export variants are explained in section
20047 \begin_inset space ~
20051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20053 reference "subsec:Export"
20061 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20063 \begin_inset Index idx
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20087 \begin_layout Standard
20088 This file type has the extension
20089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20110 because it is completely portable;
20111 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
20112 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
20116 \begin_layout Standard
20117 DVI files do not contain images,
20118 they only link to them.
20119 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
20120 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
20121 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
20122 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
20125 \begin_layout Standard
20126 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
20128 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20129 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20134 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20135 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20137 \begin_inset space ~
20143 The latter option uses the program
20145 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20151 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20154 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20155 \begin_inset space ~
20159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20161 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20167 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20168 is still a work in progress,
20169 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20175 \begin_inset Index idx
20180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 \begin_layout Standard
20200 This file type has the extension
20201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20213 PostScript was developed by the company
20217 as a printer language.
20218 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
20219 PostScript can be seen as a
20220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20223 programming language
20224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20228 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 If you are interested in learning more about this,
20234 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20240 \begin_inset Index idx
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 As a result of this,
20268 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
20271 \begin_layout Standard
20272 PostScript can only contain images in the format
20273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20276 Encapsulated PostScript
20277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20294 As \SpecialChar LyX
20295 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
20296 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
20300 \begin_inset space ~
20303 images in your document,
20306 \begin_inset space ~
20309 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
20310 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
20312 So if you plan to use PostScript,
20313 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
20316 \begin_layout Standard
20317 You can export to PostScript using the menu
20319 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20320 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20328 \begin_inset Index idx
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 \begin_inset Index idx
20355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20364 \begin_layout Standard
20365 This file type has the extension
20366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20382 Portable Document Format
20383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20390 was derived from PostScript.
20391 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20401 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20404 \begin_layout Standard
20405 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20409 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20442 Portable Network Graphics
20443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20460 You can also use any other image format,
20461 because \SpecialChar LyX
20462 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20463 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20464 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20465 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20468 \begin_layout Standard
20469 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20471 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20477 \begin_layout Description
20479 \begin_inset space ~
20482 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20486 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20489 \begin_layout Description
20491 \begin_inset space ~
20498 ) This uses the program
20500 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20503 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20506 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20515 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20516 \begin_inset space ~
20520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20522 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20528 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20529 is still a work in progress,
20530 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20534 \begin_layout Description
20536 \begin_inset space ~
20543 ) This uses the program
20548 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20554 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20555 \begin_inset space ~
20559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20561 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20567 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20569 vertically written Japanese.
20572 \begin_layout Description
20574 \begin_inset space ~
20577 (cropped) This is the same as
20580 \begin_inset space ~
20585 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20586 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20587 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20590 \begin_layout Description
20592 \begin_inset space ~
20595 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20599 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20602 \begin_layout Description
20604 \begin_inset space ~
20607 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20611 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20612 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20616 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20617 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20620 \begin_layout Standard
20624 \begin_inset space ~
20633 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20636 and works without problems.
20637 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20638 or specific OpenType fonts,
20639 you might want to try out
20642 \begin_inset space ~
20650 \begin_inset space ~
20656 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20665 \begin_inset Index idx
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 \begin_inset Index idx
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 \begin_layout Standard
20702 This file type has the extension
20703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20715 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20716 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20717 When \SpecialChar LyX
20719 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20720 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20723 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20726 between different formats,
20727 which are described in section
20729 Math Output in XHTML
20734 \begin_inset space ~
20742 \begin_layout Standard
20743 XHTML output remains
20744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20752 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20753 features are supported yet.
20757 and the World Wide Web
20762 Additional Features
20765 for more information.
20768 \begin_layout Standard
20769 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20771 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20772 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20778 \begin_layout Subsection
20780 \begin_inset Index idx
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20804 \begin_layout Standard
20805 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20806 with all of the page breaks in place,
20807 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20817 or use the toolbar button
20824 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20825 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20826 \begin_inset space ~
20830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20832 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20837 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20838 \begin_inset space ~
20842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20844 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20850 Further output formats can be selected via
20852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20853 View (Other Formats)
20855 or the toolbar button
20864 \begin_layout Standard
20865 If you have changed your document,
20866 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20868 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20874 Update (Other Formats)
20880 \begin_layout Standard
20881 When you preview a file,
20882 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20883 's temporary directory.
20884 To have a real output,
20885 export your document.
20888 \begin_layout Section
20889 A few Words about Typography
20890 \begin_inset Index idx
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 \begin_layout Subsection
20906 Dashes and Minus Signs
20907 \begin_inset Index idx
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20919 \begin_inset Index idx
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20933 \begin_layout Standard
20934 In \SpecialChar LyX
20937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20948 symbol comes in four variants:
20969 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20975 \begin_layout Standard
20976 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20986 height_special "totalheight"
20991 backgroundcolor "none"
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20995 \begin_inset Tabular
20996 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
20997 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20998 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20999 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21000 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21001 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21002 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21030 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21031 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21070 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21071 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 system key combination
21097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 the en dash is entered with
21102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21111 and the em dash with
21114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21127 is the Mac label for the right
21137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21150 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21151 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 system key combination or
21175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21189 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 \begin_inset Formula $-$
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21241 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21247 \begin_layout Standard
21248 Dashes can also be inserted with
21250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21252 \begin_inset space ~
21255 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
21263 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
21266 \begin_layout Standard
21267 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
21268 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
21269 Here are some examples:
21272 \begin_layout Enumerate
21273 line- and page-breaks
21274 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21284 \begin_layout Enumerate
21287 \begin_inset space ~
21291 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21301 \begin_layout Enumerate
21302 The em dash is used without spaces:
21305 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21315 \begin_layout Enumerate
21316 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
21320 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21330 \begin_layout Standard
21332 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21334 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
21335 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
21343 \begin_layout Subsection
21344 Dashes and Line Breaks
21345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21347 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
21354 \begin_layout Standard
21355 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
21357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21363 \begin_layout Itemize
21365 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
21366 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
21369 \begin_layout Itemize
21371 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
21374 \begin_layout Itemize
21375 In French and Spanish,
21376 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
21377 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
21380 \begin_layout Standard
21382 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
21383 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21394 allows line breaks after hyphens
21395 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21398 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21401 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21404 \begin_layout Enumerate
21405 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21406 \begin_inset space ~
21409 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21411 The Elements of Typographic Style
21414 \begin_inset space ~
21417 – can be prevented using
21418 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21420 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21426 \begin_layout Enumerate
21427 Unwanted line breaks
21432 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21434 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21437 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21444 Prevent Hyphenation
21449 \begin_inset space ~
21465 in \SpecialChar TeX
21467 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21470 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21472 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21474 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21475 space does not suffice
21479 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21486 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21487 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21488 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21501 \begin_layout Itemize
21503 \begin_inset space ~
21507 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21517 height_special "totalheight"
21522 backgroundcolor "none"
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 \begin_layout Itemize
21536 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21546 height_special "totalheight"
21551 backgroundcolor "none"
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 \begin_inset space ~
21564 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21565 \begin_inset space ~
21568 – sont très utiles.
21571 \begin_layout Itemize
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 un inciso con rayas—
21591 \begin_layout Standard
21592 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21593 \begin_inset space ~
21596 – in contrast to an overfull line
21597 \begin_inset space ~
21600 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21604 \begin_layout Standard
21605 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21606 you can select the option
21608 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21609 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21610 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21611 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21616 \begin_layout Enumerate
21617 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21618 They can be prevented using
21619 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21621 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21624 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21630 \begin_layout Itemize
21632 \begin_inset space ~
21635 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21636 \begin_inset space ~
21639 – sont très utiles.
21643 \begin_layout Enumerate
21644 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21645 \begin_inset Newline newline
21650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21651 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21653 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21655 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21657 \begin_inset space ~
21663 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21665 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21667 \begin_inset space ~
21678 \begin_layout Itemize
21679 Em-dashes without spaces—
21680 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21681 common in American English—
21682 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21683 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21686 \begin_layout Standard
21687 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21688 \begin_inset space ~
21692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21694 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21706 \begin_layout Enumerate
21709 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21710 \begin_inset space ~
21714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21716 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21727 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21728 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21731 \begin_layout Standard
21732 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21734 \begin_inset space ~
21738 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21747 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21755 \begin_layout Standard
21756 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21758 \begin_inset space ~
21762 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21763 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21772 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21777 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 The behavior was changed since
21787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21805 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21806 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21814 \begin_layout Standard
21817 \begin_inset space ~
21825 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21827 \begin_inset space ~
21830 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21834 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21835 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21836 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21838 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21843 If you used both literal and
21844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21851 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21853 \begin_inset space ~
21857 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21860 \begin_layout Subsection
21862 \begin_inset Index idx
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21876 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21883 \begin_layout Standard
21884 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21885 but automatically in the output.
21886 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21892 \begin_inset Index idx
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 following the rules of the document language.
21916 does not hyphenate text in the
21920 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21923 \begin_layout Standard
21925 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21926 it only has problems with text in the
21930 font and with unusual constructs,
21932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21940 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21941 cannot break a word correctly,
21942 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21943 This is done with the menu
21945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21946 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21948 \begin_inset space ~
21954 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21956 If no hyphenation is necessary,
21961 \begin_layout Standard
21962 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
21963 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
21964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21973 would then see the hyphen
21974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21981 as a line break possibility.
21982 A line break at this point would look ugly.
21983 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
21985 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
21987 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
21992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21993 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21995 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
21997 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
22002 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
22004 Prevent Hyphenation
22009 \begin_inset space ~
22017 \begin_layout Subsection
22019 \begin_inset Index idx
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22034 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
22035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22037 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
22044 \begin_layout Standard
22045 When \SpecialChar LyX
22046 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
22047 to generate the final version of your document,
22049 automatically distinguishes between words,
22054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22057 appropriate amount of space.
22058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22061 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
22062 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
22065 \begin_layout Standard
22067 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
22069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22080 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
22081 it's the end of a sentence;
22082 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
22083 it's an abbreviation.
22086 \begin_layout Standard
22087 Here are some examples of
22091 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
22094 \begin_layout Itemize
22099 \begin_layout Itemize
22104 \begin_layout Standard
22105 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
22108 \begin_layout Itemize
22110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22114 this is too much space!
22117 \begin_layout Itemize
22122 \begin_layout Standard
22123 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
22126 \begin_layout Standard
22127 To fix this problem,
22128 use one of the following:
22131 \begin_layout Enumerate
22135 \begin_inset space ~
22140 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
22141 \begin_inset space ~
22145 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
22147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22149 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
22155 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
22157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22159 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
22167 \begin_inset Index idx
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22191 \begin_layout Enumerate
22195 \begin_inset space ~
22200 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
22201 \begin_inset space ~
22205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22207 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
22213 \begin_inset Index idx
22218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22237 \begin_layout Enumerate
22241 \begin_inset space ~
22245 \begin_inset space ~
22249 \begin_inset space ~
22256 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22258 \begin_inset space ~
22263 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
22264 This function is also bound to
22267 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
22273 \begin_layout Standard
22274 With the corrections,
22275 our earlier examples look like this:
22278 \begin_layout Itemize
22280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22284 \begin_inset space \space{}
22287 this is too much space!
22290 \begin_layout Itemize
22291 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
22295 \begin_layout Standard
22296 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
22297 If your language is such a language,
22298 you don't need to worry,
22299 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
22300 will take care of this.
22303 \begin_layout Standard
22304 For those that do need to bother,
22305 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
22309 \begin_inset space ~
22315 feature described in the section
22317 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
22322 Additional Features
22327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22329 \begin_inset Index idx
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 \begin_inset Index idx
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 \begin_layout Standard
22377 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
22379 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
22380 and use a closing mark at the end.
22383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22391 The keyboard character,
22397 generates this automatically.
22400 \begin_layout Standard
22401 You can specify what character the
22405 key produces by using the submenu
22411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22415 \begin_inset Index idx
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 dialog and switching the
22440 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22441 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22443 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22445 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22449 \begin_inset space ~
22455 \begin_layout Labeling
22456 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22468 \begin_inset space ~
22472 \begin_inset space ~
22476 \begin_inset Quotes els
22480 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22494 \begin_inset Quotes els
22498 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22501 quotation marks (as common,
22503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22510 \begin_layout Labeling
22511 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22514 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22518 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22522 \begin_inset space ~
22526 \begin_inset space ~
22530 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22534 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22540 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22544 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22548 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22552 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22555 quotation marks (as common,
22557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22564 \begin_layout Labeling
22565 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22568 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22572 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22576 \begin_inset space ~
22580 \begin_inset space ~
22584 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22588 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22594 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22598 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22602 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22606 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22609 quotation marks (as common,
22611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22618 \begin_layout Labeling
22619 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22622 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22626 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22630 \begin_inset space ~
22634 \begin_inset space ~
22638 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22642 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22648 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22652 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22656 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22660 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22663 quotation marks (as common,
22665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22672 \begin_layout Labeling
22673 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22676 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22680 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22684 \begin_inset space ~
22688 \begin_inset space ~
22692 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22696 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22702 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22706 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22710 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22714 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22717 quotation marks (as common,
22719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22726 \begin_layout Labeling
22727 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22730 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22734 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22738 \begin_inset space ~
22742 \begin_inset space ~
22746 \begin_inset Quotes als
22750 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22756 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22760 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22764 \begin_inset Quotes als
22768 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22771 quotation marks (as common,
22773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22780 \begin_layout Labeling
22781 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22784 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22788 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22792 \begin_inset space ~
22796 \begin_inset space ~
22800 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22804 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22810 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22814 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22818 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22822 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22825 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
22828 \begin_layout Labeling
22829 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22832 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22836 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22840 \begin_inset space ~
22844 \begin_inset space ~
22848 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22852 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22858 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22862 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22866 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22870 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22873 quotation marks (as common,
22875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22882 \begin_layout Labeling
22883 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22886 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22890 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22894 \begin_inset space ~
22898 \begin_inset space ~
22902 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22906 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22912 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22916 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22920 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22924 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22927 quotation marks (as common,
22929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22936 \begin_layout Labeling
22937 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22940 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22944 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22948 \begin_inset space ~
22952 \begin_inset space ~
22956 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22960 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22966 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22970 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22974 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22978 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22981 quotation marks (another style common in France)
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
22987 since these look identical to the inner marks.
22988 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
22996 \begin_layout Labeling
22997 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23000 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23004 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23008 \begin_inset space ~
23012 \begin_inset space ~
23016 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23020 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23026 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23030 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23034 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23038 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23041 quotation marks (as common,
23043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23050 \begin_layout Labeling
23051 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23054 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23058 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23062 \begin_inset space ~
23066 \begin_inset space ~
23070 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23074 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23080 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23084 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23088 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23092 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23095 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
23096 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
23100 \begin_layout Labeling
23101 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23103 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
23106 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23110 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23114 \begin_inset space ~
23118 \begin_inset space ~
23122 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23126 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23134 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23142 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23150 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23158 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23163 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23168 \begin_layout Labeling
23169 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23170 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23178 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23184 \begin_inset space ~
23188 \begin_inset space ~
23194 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23202 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23206 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23210 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23214 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23218 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23221 quotation marks (as common,
23223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23233 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
23234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23236 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
23242 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23250 \begin_layout Labeling
23251 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23252 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23260 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23266 \begin_inset space ~
23270 \begin_inset space ~
23276 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23284 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23288 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23292 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23296 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23300 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23303 quotation marks (as common,
23305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23309 in North Korea and China)
23310 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23312 \begin_inset script superscript
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23319 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
23335 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23351 \begin_layout Standard
23352 Inner quotation marks
23356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23357 In many writing cultures,
23358 these are single quotation marks.
23359 But as the British and French styles show,
23360 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
23361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23368 does not necessarily mean
23369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23377 This is why we call them
23378 \begin_inset Quotes els
23382 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23398 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23400 \begin_inset Quotes els
23404 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23407 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23410 arg "quote-insert inner"
23415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23421 \begin_layout Standard
23423 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23425 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23426 even if the document-wide style changes.
23427 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23428 If you check the setting
23430 Use dynamic quotation marks
23434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23435 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23440 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23441 they appear in a special color).
23442 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23443 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23448 if your publisher requests a different style).
23451 \begin_layout Standard
23452 Individual quotation marks (i.
23453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23457 their level [inner,
23461 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23464 \begin_layout Subsection
23466 \begin_inset Index idx
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23488 \begin_inset Index idx
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23512 name "subsec:Ligatures"
23519 \begin_layout Standard
23520 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
23521 These groups are known as
23526 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
23527 knows about ligatures,
23528 your documents will contain them too in the output.
23529 Here are the standard ligatures:
23532 \begin_layout Itemize
23536 \begin_layout Itemize
23540 \begin_layout Itemize
23544 \begin_layout Itemize
23548 \begin_layout Itemize
23552 \begin_layout Standard
23553 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
23556 \begin_layout Standard
23558 you don't want a ligature in a word.
23559 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
23561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23568 it looks really weird in compound words,
23570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23585 To break a ligature,
23588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23589 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23591 \begin_inset space ~
23598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23609 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23626 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23634 \begin_layout Subsection
23636 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
23638 \begin_inset Index idx
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23663 \begin_layout Standard
23666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23667 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
23672 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
23675 \begin_layout Description
23677 The name of the game.
23680 \begin_layout Description
23682 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
23686 \begin_layout Description
23688 The \SpecialChar TeX
23689 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
23693 \begin_layout Description
23694 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
23695 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23699 \begin_layout Standard
23700 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23706 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
23710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23714 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
23715 world to give programs geek version numbers.
23716 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
23717 converges to the number
23718 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
23722 The actual version is
23723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23732 the previous one was
23733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23744 \begin_layout Subsection
23746 \begin_inset Index idx
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 \begin_layout Standard
23771 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
23772 As you can see in the example below,
23773 it looks better when the space is smaller.
23775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23782 for units use the menu
23784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23785 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23787 \begin_inset space ~
23795 arg "space-insert thin"
23801 \begin_layout Standard
23802 Here is an example to show the differences:
23805 \begin_layout Standard
23806 \begin_inset Tabular
23807 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
23808 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23809 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23810 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23817 \begin_inset space ~
23821 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 space between number and unit
23840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23849 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 half space between number and unit
23874 \begin_layout Subsection
23876 \begin_inset Index idx
23881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 \begin_layout Standard
23901 In the early days of word processors,
23902 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
23903 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
23904 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
23905 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
23906 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
23907 These bits of text became known as
23918 \begin_layout Standard
23921 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
23922 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
23923 But what about widows and orphans,
23924 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
23925 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
23926 governing page breaks,
23927 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
23928 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
23929 you can add the commands
23930 \begin_inset Newline newline
23938 \begin_inset Newline newline
23946 \begin_inset Newline newline
23949 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23950 preamble of your document to avoid them.
23951 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
23953 \begin_inset space ~
23957 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
23959 key "latexcompanion"
23965 \begin_inset space ~
23969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
23976 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23977 's page break mechanism.
23980 \begin_layout Chapter
23984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23986 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
23993 \begin_layout Standard
23994 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23997 \begin_inset space ~
24003 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24006 \begin_layout Section
24008 \begin_inset Index idx
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24029 \begin_layout Standard
24031 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
24034 \begin_layout Description
24037 \begin_inset space ~
24040 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
24041 \begin_inset Newline newline
24045 \begin_inset Note Note
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24049 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
24057 \begin_layout Description
24058 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
24059 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24062 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
24063 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
24065 \begin_inset space ~
24071 \begin_inset Newline newline
24075 \begin_inset Note Comment
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
24088 \begin_layout Description
24090 \begin_inset space ~
24093 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
24095 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
24097 \begin_inset space ~
24103 \begin_inset Newline newline
24107 \begin_inset Newline newline
24111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24120 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
24121 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
24126 of a comment that appears in the output.
24132 \begin_inset Newline newline
24136 \begin_inset Newline newline
24139 As you can see in the example,
24140 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
24143 \begin_layout Standard
24144 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
24152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24156 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
24159 \begin_layout Section
24161 \begin_inset Index idx
24166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24175 name "sec:Footnotes"
24182 \begin_layout Standard
24184 uses boxes to display footnotes:
24185 When you insert a footnote using the menu
24187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24190 or the toolbar button
24193 arg "footnote-insert"
24207 \begin_inset Graphics
24208 filename clipart/footnote.png
24217 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24218 's representation of your footnote.
24228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24252 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
24253 Clicking on the box label again will close
24266 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
24267 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
24282 \begin_layout Standard
24283 Here is an example footnote:
24291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 To close a footnote,
24293 click on the footnote box label.
24301 \begin_layout Standard
24302 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
24303 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
24304 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
24305 according to the document class.
24307 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
24308 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24314 ey are described in the
24317 \begin_inset space ~
24325 \begin_layout Section
24327 \begin_inset Index idx
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24341 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
24348 \begin_layout Standard
24349 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
24351 When you insert a margin note via the menu
24353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24355 \begin_inset space ~
24360 or the toolbar button
24363 arg "marginalnote-insert"
24383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24390 appearing within your text.
24391 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24392 's representation of your margin
24401 \begin_layout Standard
24402 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24406 \begin_inset Marginal
24409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24411 This is a marginal note.
24419 \begin_layout Standard
24420 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24421 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24422 right on odd pages.
24425 \begin_layout Standard
24426 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24429 \begin_inset space ~
24437 \begin_inset space ~
24445 \begin_layout Section
24446 Graphics and Images
24447 \begin_inset Index idx
24452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24459 \begin_inset Index idx
24464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24473 name "sec:Graphics"
24480 \begin_layout Standard
24481 To insert an image in your document,
24482 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24485 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24494 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
24497 \begin_layout Standard
24498 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
24503 tab allows you to choose your image file.
24504 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
24505 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
24506 \begin_inset space ~
24510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24512 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
24520 \begin_layout Standard
24525 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
24526 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
24529 \begin_inset space ~
24533 \begin_inset space ~
24542 \begin_inset space ~
24546 \begin_inset space ~
24550 \begin_inset space ~
24555 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
24556 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
24563 \begin_layout Standard
24567 \begin_inset space ~
24571 \begin_inset space ~
24576 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
24577 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
24579 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
24584 \begin_inset space ~
24589 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
24590 only a frame with the image size is printed.
24593 \begin_layout Standard
24594 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
24595 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
24596 This is an example image within a separate,
24597 horizontally centered paragraph:
24600 \begin_layout Standard
24602 \begin_inset Graphics
24603 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
24611 \begin_layout Standard
24612 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
24613 you have to put the image into a float,
24615 \begin_inset space ~
24619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24621 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24629 \begin_layout Subsection
24631 \begin_inset Index idx
24636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24638 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24655 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
24662 \begin_layout Standard
24663 You can insert images in any known file format.
24664 But as we explained in section
24665 \begin_inset space ~
24669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24671 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24677 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
24679 therefore uses the program
24683 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
24684 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
24685 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
24686 \begin_inset space ~
24690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24692 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24700 \begin_layout Standard
24701 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
24704 \begin_layout Description
24706 \begin_inset space ~
24709 images consist of pixel values,
24710 often in a compressed form.
24711 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
24712 Well-known bitmap image formats are
24713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24716 Graphics Interchange Format
24717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24734 \begin_inset Index idx
24739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24760 Portable Network Graphics
24761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24778 \begin_inset Index idx
24783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24785 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24804 Joint Photographic Experts Group
24805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24834 \begin_inset Index idx
24839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24841 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24858 \begin_layout Description
24860 \begin_inset space ~
24863 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
24864 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
24865 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
24866 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
24867 \begin_inset Newline newline
24870 Scalable image formats can be
24871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24874 Scalable Vector Graphics
24875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24892 \begin_inset Index idx
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24899 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24918 Encapsulated PostScript
24919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24936 \begin_inset Index idx
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24943 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24962 Portable Document Format
24963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24980 \begin_inset Index idx
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25001 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
25002 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
25006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25007 In the case of PDF,
25008 the original image is additionally compressed.
25016 \begin_layout Standard
25017 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
25025 \begin_layout Subsection
25026 Grouping of Image Settings
25027 \begin_inset Index idx
25032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25034 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25051 \begin_layout Standard
25052 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
25053 Images within such a group share their settings,
25054 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
25055 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
25058 \begin_layout Standard
25059 A new group can be set by pressing the button
25062 \begin_inset space ~
25066 \begin_inset space ~
25078 \begin_inset space ~
25082 \begin_inset space ~
25088 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
25091 \begin_layout Section
25093 \begin_inset Index idx
25098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25114 \begin_layout Standard
25115 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
25118 arg "tabular-insert"
25123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25127 A dialog will appear,
25128 asking you for the number of rows and columns
25129 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
25131 and you can select a specific (border) style
25134 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
25135 This separation appears due to a double line:
25136 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
25137 Here is an example table:
25140 \begin_layout Standard
25142 \begin_inset Tabular
25143 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
25144 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25147 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25148 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25342 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
25346 \begin_layout Standard
25348 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
25349 This corresponds to the
25350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25357 table style listed in the style selection.
25360 \begin_layout Standard
25362 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
25363 Other available styles include:
25366 \begin_layout Itemize
25368 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
25370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25377 which looks line the above table,
25378 but without the first row being separated via double line,
25381 \begin_layout Itemize
25383 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
25384 a border-less table with no lines at all,
25387 \begin_layout Itemize
25389 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25398 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25409 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25410 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25415 \begin_layout Standard
25417 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25418 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25421 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25425 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25426 you should alter this setting.
25429 \begin_layout Subsection
25433 \begin_layout Standard
25434 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25436 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25440 This brings up the table dialog.
25441 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25442 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25443 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25444 This means that if you select more cells,
25445 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25448 \begin_layout Standard
25449 In addition to the table dialog,
25453 \begin_inset space ~
25458 helps you in setting table properties.
25459 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25462 \begin_layout Standard
25466 \begin_inset space ~
25471 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25472 If you add a row or column,
25473 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25474 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25475 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25477 \begin_inset space ~
25481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25483 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
25491 \begin_layout Standard
25492 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
25501 This will merge the cells to
25506 spread over more than one column/row.
25507 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
25508 so that the alignment,
25510 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
25511 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
25514 \begin_layout Standard
25516 \begin_inset Tabular
25517 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
25518 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
25519 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25520 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
25521 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25522 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25533 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25542 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25618 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25653 \begin_layout Standard
25654 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
25655 -arguments for the table.
25656 They are necessary for special table formatting,
25657 such as the multirow cells,
25658 explained in the chapter
25665 \begin_inset space ~
25671 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
25672 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
25673 but are visible in the output.
25676 \begin_layout Standard
25677 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25686 Most DVI-viewers are
25690 able to display rotations.
25698 \begin_layout Standard
25703 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
25708 adds lines for all cell borders.
25711 \begin_layout Subsection
25713 \begin_inset Index idx
25718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25735 \begin_inset Index idx
25740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25749 \begin_layout Standard
25750 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
25751 you can use the option
25754 \begin_inset space ~
25758 \begin_inset space ~
25766 \begin_inset space ~
25771 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
25772 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
25775 \begin_layout Description
25781 The current row and all rows above,
25782 that don't have any special options defined,
25783 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
25784 Except for the first page,
25788 \begin_inset space ~
25796 \begin_layout Description
25800 \begin_inset space ~
25806 The current row and all rows above,
25807 that don't have any special options defined,
25808 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
25811 \begin_layout Description
25817 The current row and all rows below,
25818 that don't have any special options defined,
25819 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
25820 except for the last page,
25824 \begin_inset space ~
25832 \begin_layout Description
25836 \begin_inset space ~
25842 The current row and all rows below,
25843 that don't have any special options defined,
25844 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
25847 \begin_layout Description
25849 The first row is reset as a single column.
25850 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
25852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25856 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
25859 \begin_inset space ~
25867 \begin_layout Standard
25868 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
25869 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
25870 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
25871 the others will be defined as
25877 first means first in this order:
25882 \begin_inset space ~
25896 \begin_inset space ~
25902 see the following longtable to see how it works:
25905 \begin_layout Standard
25907 \begin_inset Tabular
25908 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
25909 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
25910 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
25911 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25912 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25913 <row endfirsthead="true">
25914 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25920 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
25925 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25934 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25944 <row endfirsthead="true">
25945 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25956 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25965 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25977 <row endhead="true">
25978 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25989 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25998 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26008 <row endhead="true">
26009 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26020 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26029 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26041 <row endfoot="true">
26042 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26053 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26062 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26093 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27035 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27044 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27053 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27095 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27126 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27219 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27250 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27312 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27405 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27436 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27467 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27529 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27560 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27591 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27622 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27653 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27684 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27715 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27747 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27778 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27809 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27840 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27871 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27902 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27933 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27964 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27995 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28025 <row endlastfoot="true">
28026 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28037 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
28040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28046 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28063 \begin_layout Subsection
28065 \begin_inset Index idx
28070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28072 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28089 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
28096 \begin_layout Standard
28097 A table cell can contain text,
28101 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
28102 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
28103 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
28109 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
28112 \begin_layout Standard
28113 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
28114 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
28115 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
28119 \begin_layout Standard
28121 \begin_inset Tabular
28122 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
28123 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28125 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
28126 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28146 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28215 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28271 This is longer now.
28276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28327 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28328 This is longer now.
28333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28359 \begin_layout Standard
28360 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
28361 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
28365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28366 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
28371 Selection with the mouse or with
28375 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
28376 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
28379 \begin_layout Section
28381 \begin_inset Index idx
28386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28402 \begin_layout Subsection
28406 \begin_layout Standard
28407 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28408 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28417 forward or backward a page or two,
28418 to wherever it fits best.
28426 \begin_inset space ~
28432 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28435 \begin_layout Standard
28436 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28437 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28438 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28439 every float can be referenced in the text.
28440 Floats are therefore numbered.
28441 Referencing is described in section
28442 \begin_inset space ~
28446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28448 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28456 \begin_layout Standard
28460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28464 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28465 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28466 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28467 \begin_inset Index idx
28472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28474 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28488 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28489 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
28490 -document readable,
28491 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
28492 A closed float box looks like this:
28494 \begin_inset Graphics
28495 filename clipart/float.png
28500 – a gray button with a red label.
28503 \begin_layout Standard
28504 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
28505 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
28508 \begin_layout Subsection
28510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28512 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
28517 \begin_inset Index idx
28522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28524 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28541 \begin_layout Standard
28543 \begin_inset space ~
28547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28549 reference "fig:A-star-in"
28554 was created using the menu
28556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28557 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28563 arg "float-insert figure"
28567 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
28569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28575 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
28579 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
28581 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28583 \begin_inset space ~
28591 arg "layout-paragraph"
28597 \begin_layout Standard
28598 \begin_inset Float figure
28605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 \begin_inset Graphics
28608 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28623 name "fig:A-star-in"
28640 \begin_layout Standard
28641 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
28642 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
28644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28653 ) and refer to it using the menu
28655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28661 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28665 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
28666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28675 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28676 will reposition the floats in the final document,
28678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28686 For more about cross-references,
28688 \begin_inset space ~
28692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28694 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28702 \begin_layout Standard
28703 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
28704 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
28705 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
28706 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
28707 \begin_inset space ~
28711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28713 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28720 \begin_inset space ~
28724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28726 reference "fig:Two-images"
28731 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
28732 You can also set the images one below the other.
28734 \begin_inset space ~
28738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28740 reference "fig:Undefinable"
28746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28748 reference "fig:Star"
28753 are the subfigures.
28756 \begin_layout Standard
28757 \begin_inset Float figure
28764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28765 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28769 \begin_inset Float figure
28776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28777 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28782 name "fig:Undefinable"
28794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28795 \begin_inset Graphics
28796 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
28808 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28812 \begin_inset Float figure
28819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28820 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28838 \begin_inset Graphics
28839 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28851 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28858 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28863 name "fig:Two-images"
28880 \begin_layout Subsection
28882 \begin_inset Index idx
28887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28889 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28906 \begin_layout Standard
28907 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
28909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28910 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28913 or the toolbar button
28916 arg "float-insert table"
28920 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
28922 \begin_inset space ~
28926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28928 reference "tab:Table-float"
28936 \begin_layout Standard
28937 \begin_inset Float table
28944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28945 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28950 name "tab:Table-float"
28962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28964 \begin_inset Tabular
28965 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
28966 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28967 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28969 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29096 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
29104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29117 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29120 \end{array}\right]$
29128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29141 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
29162 \begin_layout Subsection
29164 \begin_inset Index idx
29169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29171 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29188 \begin_layout Standard
29190 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
29191 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
29192 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
29193 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
29200 \begin_inset space ~
29208 \begin_layout Section
29210 \begin_inset Index idx
29215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29224 \begin_layout Standard
29226 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
29229 all the usual rules of indentation,
29232 \begin_inset space \space{}
29238 \begin_layout Standard
29239 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
29240 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
29242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29246 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
29249 \begin_layout Standard
29251 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29261 height_special "totalheight"
29266 backgroundcolor "none"
29269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29272 This is a minipage.
29273 The text is set in an italic style.
29276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29279 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
29287 \begin_layout Standard
29288 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29291 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
29296 as described in section
29297 \begin_inset space ~
29301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29303 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
29309 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29315 \begin_layout Standard
29316 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29326 height_special "totalheight"
29331 backgroundcolor "none"
29334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29335 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29336 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29342 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29346 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29356 height_special "totalheight"
29361 backgroundcolor "none"
29364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29365 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29366 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29374 \begin_layout Standard
29375 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29381 \begin_layout Standard
29382 When you right-click on a minipage box,
29383 you can transform the box to another box type.
29384 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29391 \begin_inset space ~
29399 \begin_layout Chapter
29400 Mathematical Formulas
29401 \begin_inset Index idx
29406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29413 \begin_inset Index idx
29418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29420 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29437 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29444 \begin_layout Standard
29445 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29450 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29453 \begin_layout Section
29455 \begin_inset Index idx
29460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29462 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29479 \begin_layout Standard
29480 To create a math formula,
29481 you can just click on the toolbar icon
29494 That will create a little blue rectangle,
29495 with purple markers around its corners.
29496 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
29497 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
29498 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
29500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29506 \begin_layout Standard
29507 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
29510 \begin_inset space ~
29516 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
29519 \begin_layout Standard
29520 There are two main types of formulas,
29521 inline formulas and display formulas.
29522 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
29526 \begin_layout Standard
29527 This is a line with an inline formula
29528 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
29534 \begin_layout Standard
29535 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
29537 \begin_inset Formula
29544 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
29547 \begin_layout Standard
29549 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29567 followed by a space,
29568 in a formula will create the Greek letter
29569 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
29573 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
29576 \begin_inset space ~
29584 \begin_layout Subsection
29585 Navigating in Formulas
29586 \begin_inset Index idx
29591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29593 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29610 \begin_layout Standard
29611 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
29613 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
29614 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
29619 will leave a formula construct (a square root
29620 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
29625 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
29630 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29633 \end{array}\right]$
29641 will leave the formula,
29642 placing the cursor after the formula.
29647 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
29649 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
29652 \begin_layout Standard
29658 printed in this document as
29659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29663 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29671 seems to do nothing in a formula,
29672 since it does not add a space between characters,
29673 but it does exit a nested structure.
29675 you have to be careful about using
29682 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
29691 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29701 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29705 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29711 since in the latter case only the
29714 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
29719 will be under the square root sign:
29721 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
29727 \begin_layout Standard
29728 You can leave many parts of a formula,
29730 partially filled in,
29732 \begin_inset Formula
29734 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29743 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
29744 or a subscript with nothing in it,
29745 the results will be unpredictable,
29746 but most constructs don't mind.
29749 \begin_layout Subsection
29753 \begin_layout Standard
29754 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
29755 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
29760 and a cursor movement key to select text.
29761 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
29763 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
29764 That text can then be cut or copied,
29765 and then pasted within any formula,
29766 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
29770 \begin_layout Subsection
29771 Exponents and Subscripts
29772 \begin_inset Index idx
29777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29779 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29794 \begin_inset Index idx
29799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29801 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29818 \begin_layout Standard
29819 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
29822 arg "math-superscript"
29828 arg "math-subscript"
29832 but it is often much easier to use a command.
29834 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
29841 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29851 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
29858 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
29863 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
29870 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29876 If you use characters in the superscript,
29877 that could be accented with the circumflex
29878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29886 you have to use an extra
29890 to separate the circumflex and the character.
29893 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
29900 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29906 Subscripts are similar:
29908 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
29915 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29923 \begin_layout Subsection
29925 \begin_inset Index idx
29930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29932 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29950 Create a fraction either with the command
29956 or by using the icon
29959 arg "math-insert \\frac"
29965 \begin_inset space ~
29971 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
29972 The cursor is above the fraction line.
29973 To move it to the bottom,
29985 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
29986 as this example shows:
29987 \begin_inset Formula
29989 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
29992 \end{array}\right)}\right]
30000 \begin_layout Subsection
30002 \begin_inset Index idx
30007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30009 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30026 \begin_layout Standard
30027 Roots can be created using the
30030 \begin_inset space ~
30038 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
30044 arg "math-insert \\root"
30066 you can produce roots of higher orders,
30074 always produces a square root.
30077 \begin_layout Subsection
30078 Operators with Limits
30079 \begin_inset Index idx
30084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30086 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30101 \begin_inset Index idx
30106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30108 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30125 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30132 \begin_layout Standard
30134 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
30138 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
30141 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
30142 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30143 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
30144 directly after the symbol.
30145 The sum operator will automatically place its
30146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30153 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
30154 and to the side in inline formulas,
30156 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
30161 \begin_inset Formula
30163 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
30170 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
30173 \begin_layout Standard
30174 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
30175 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
30177 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30178 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30180 \begin_inset space ~
30184 \begin_inset space ~
30198 \begin_layout Standard
30199 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
30200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30209 \begin_inset Index idx
30214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30216 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30231 \begin_inset Formula
30233 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
30238 which will place the
30239 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
30243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30251 In inline formulas it looks like this:
30253 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
30259 \begin_layout Standard
30260 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
30267 Have a look at section
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30274 reference "subsec:Functions"
30279 for an explanation of function macros.
30282 \begin_layout Subsection
30284 \begin_inset Index idx
30289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30308 \begin_layout Standard
30309 Most math symbols can be found in the
30312 \begin_inset space ~
30317 under one of several categories;
30338 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
30341 \begin_layout Standard
30342 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30343 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
30344 you don't have to use the
30347 \begin_inset space ~
30353 you can type the command directly into the formula.
30355 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
30358 \begin_layout Subsection
30360 \begin_inset Index idx
30365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30367 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30384 \begin_layout Standard
30385 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30391 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30397 \begin_inset space ~
30405 arg "math-insert \\space"
30409 This generates a small space,
30410 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30418 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30421 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30423 \begin_inset Graphics
30424 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30429 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30430 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30431 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30433 because they are negative spaces.
30434 Here are two examples:
30437 \begin_layout Standard
30448 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30454 \begin_layout Standard
30465 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30471 \begin_layout Subsection
30473 \begin_inset Index idx
30478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30480 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30497 name "subsec:Functions"
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30508 \begin_inset space ~
30513 contains under the button
30516 arg "math-insert \\functions"
30519 a number of function macros,
30521 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
30526 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
30535 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
30542 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
30544 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
30548 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
30557 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
30561 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
30567 \begin_layout Standard
30568 For some mathematical objects,
30570 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
30571 as described in section
30572 \begin_inset space ~
30576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30578 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30586 \begin_layout Subsection
30588 \begin_inset Index idx
30593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30595 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 \begin_layout Standard
30613 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
30614 This may depend on your keyboard,
30615 or the bindings file you use.
30616 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30620 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30623 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
30624 Our example is entered by typing
30629 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30636 \begin_inset space ~
30640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30642 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
30647 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 \begin_inset Float table
30658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30659 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30664 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
30668 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
30676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30678 \begin_inset Tabular
30679 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
30680 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30767 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30821 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
30831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30875 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
30885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
30939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30983 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
30993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31037 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
31047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
31101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
31155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31199 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
31209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31244 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
31265 \begin_layout Standard
31266 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
31269 \begin_inset space ~
31277 arg "math-insert \\hat"
31281 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
31284 \begin_layout Section
31285 Brackets and Delimiters
31286 \begin_inset Index idx
31291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31293 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31308 \begin_inset Index idx
31313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31315 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31332 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31339 \begin_layout Standard
31340 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
31343 using just the keys
31348 But if you want to surround a large structure,
31349 like a matrix or a fraction,
31350 or if you have several layers of brackets,
31351 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
31354 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31359 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
31360 \begin_inset Formula
31362 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
31370 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
31372 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
31375 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31378 and the expression on the right was entered using the
31384 \begin_inset Formula
31386 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31394 \begin_layout Standard
31395 If you use the delimiter icon,
31397 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31400 \begin_layout Standard
31401 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31402 If you use the option
31405 \begin_inset space ~
31411 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31412 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31414 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31420 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31421 with a dotted line,
31422 but nothing will be printed.
31425 \begin_layout Standard
31426 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31427 like a square root,
31428 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31429 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31434 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31437 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31439 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31440 select the structure and enter
31443 arg "math-delim ( )"
31449 \begin_layout Section
31450 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31451 \begin_inset Index idx
31456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31458 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31473 \begin_inset Index idx
31478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31480 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31495 \begin_inset Index idx
31500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31502 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31506 Multi-line Equations
31519 \begin_layout Standard
31520 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
31524 \begin_inset space ~
31532 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
31536 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
31537 Here is an example:
31538 \begin_inset Formula
31540 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
31549 The parentheses aren't automatic,
31550 but you can add them as described in section
31551 \begin_inset space ~
31555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31557 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31563 When you construct the matrix,
31564 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
31566 or center-justified.
31567 This alignment is set in the box
31572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31623 for every column as default.
31626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31637 means that the first column will be left-justified,
31638 the second will be centered,
31639 and the third column will be right-justified,
31640 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
31641 The result will look like this:
31642 \begin_inset Formula
31645 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
31646 column & has & has\,right\\
31647 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
31656 \begin_layout Standard
31657 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
31660 arg "newline-insert newline"
31663 while the cursor is in the matrix.
31664 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
31666 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31669 or the math toolbar.
31672 \begin_layout Standard
31673 There are other arrays used in formulas,
31674 such as distinctions of cases.
31675 It can be created with the menu
31677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31678 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31680 \begin_inset space ~
31692 Here is an example:
31694 \begin_inset Formula
31708 \begin_layout Standard
31709 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31712 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
31715 arg "newline-insert newline"
31719 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
31720 one for each column.
31724 arg "newline-insert newline"
31727 in a non-empty formula,
31728 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
31729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31736 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
31737 the relation sign is in the second column,
31738 and the rest in the third column.
31739 A new row is created by every further entry of
31742 arg "newline-insert newline"
31746 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
31747 Here is an example:
31748 \begin_inset Formula
31750 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
31751 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
31756 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
31757 \begin_inset Formula
31759 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
31767 \begin_layout Standard
31768 The multi-line formula type described here is called
31775 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
31776 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
31777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31779 reference "eq:asquared"
31785 The other types are described in section
31786 \begin_inset space ~
31790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31792 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
31800 \begin_layout Section
31801 Formula Numbering and Referencing
31802 \begin_inset Index idx
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31809 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31824 \begin_inset Index idx
31829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31835 Referencing formulas
31846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31848 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31855 \begin_layout Standard
31856 To number a formula,
31857 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
31859 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31860 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31862 \begin_inset space ~
31866 \begin_inset space ~
31874 arg "math-number-toggle"
31878 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
31879 within parentheses.
31880 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
31881 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
31882 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
31883 separated by a dot:
31884 \begin_inset Formula
31894 arg "math-number-toggle"
31897 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
31898 You can only number displayed formulas.
31901 \begin_layout Standard
31902 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
31905 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31906 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31912 \begin_inset space ~
31920 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
31923 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
31924 \begin_inset Formula
31927 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
31933 To number all lines use the shortcut
31936 arg "math-number-toggle"
31942 \begin_layout Standard
31943 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31946 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
31947 A label is inserted with the menu
31949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31958 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
31959 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
31960 It is recommended that you use the suggested
31961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31972 as the first part of the label,
31973 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
31974 We inserted in the following example the label
31975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31982 in the second line:
31983 \begin_inset Formula
31985 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
31986 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
31991 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
31992 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
31993 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
31995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31997 \begin_inset space ~
32005 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32009 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
32010 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32011 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
32014 \begin_layout Standard
32015 This is a cross-reference to equation (
32016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32018 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32026 \begin_layout Standard
32027 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
32028 's cross-reference box are described in section
32029 \begin_inset space ~
32033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32035 reference "sec:Cross-References"
32042 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
32049 \begin_layout Section
32050 User defined math macros
32051 \begin_inset Index idx
32056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32058 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32075 \begin_layout Standard
32077 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
32078 Math macros are explained in section
32081 \begin_inset space ~
32093 \begin_layout Section
32097 \begin_layout Subsection
32099 \begin_inset Index idx
32104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32106 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32123 \begin_layout Standard
32124 The standard font for text is italic,
32125 for numbers the standard is roman.
32126 To set a font in a formula,
32130 \begin_inset space ~
32138 arg "math-insert \\font"
32142 or enter its command,
32144 \begin_inset space ~
32148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32150 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32159 \begin_layout Standard
32160 \begin_inset Float table
32167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32168 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32173 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32177 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
32185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32187 \begin_inset Tabular
32188 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
32189 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32223 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
32231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32250 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
32258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32277 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
32285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32310 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
32318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32337 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
32345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32359 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
32360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32365 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32366 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
32374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32379 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32395 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32429 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32451 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32457 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32465 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32478 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32494 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
32502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32528 \begin_layout Standard
32529 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32538 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
32541 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
32544 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
32548 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
32568 \begin_layout Standard
32569 When you use a typeface,
32570 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
32571 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
32576 within the box will set the cursor outside,
32577 so that you have to use a
32578 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
32580 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
32583 space when you need a space in the box.
32584 Here is an example where
32585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32596 denotes the set of numbers:
32597 \begin_inset Formula
32599 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
32607 \begin_layout Standard
32608 The typefaces are nestable,
32609 which can cause confusion.
32622 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
32626 \begin_inset Newline newline
32629 So it is better not to use this feature.
32632 \begin_layout Standard
32633 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
32635 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
32639 \begin_inset Newline newline
32642 You can only print them emboldened using the command
32649 which works like the other typeface commands:
32651 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
32657 \begin_layout Standard
32664 works for all symbols,
32669 \begin_layout Standard
32670 A number of other font options are available as well,
32673 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32674 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32676 \begin_inset space ~
32684 \begin_layout Subsection
32686 \begin_inset Index idx
32691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32693 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32710 \begin_layout Standard
32711 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
32713 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
32714 which is obtained using the entry
32717 \begin_inset space ~
32721 \begin_inset space ~
32729 \begin_inset space ~
32737 arg "math-insert \\font"
32741 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32742 in black instead of blue.
32743 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
32744 Here is an example:
32745 \begin_inset Formula
32748 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
32749 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
32758 \begin_layout Subsection
32760 \begin_inset Index idx
32765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32767 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32784 \begin_layout Standard
32785 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
32786 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
32807 For most characters,
32816 are actually the same size,
32818 superscripts and subscripts,
32819 and certain other structures,
32825 Except for some operators,
32826 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
32827 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
32828 thinks are appropriate.
32829 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
32832 arg "math-insert \\style"
32836 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
32839 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
32843 which is normally in
32854 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
32858 The four styles are used in the following example:
32861 \begin_layout Standard
32862 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
32867 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
32872 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
32877 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
32883 \begin_layout Standard
32884 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
32886 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32888 \begin_inset space ~
32894 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
32896 if the base font size of the document is changed,
32897 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
32898 As an example here is a formula in the font size
32899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32909 \begin_layout Standard
32913 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
32919 \begin_layout Section
32920 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
32922 \begin_inset Index idx
32927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32934 \begin_inset Index idx
32939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32941 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32958 \begin_layout Standard
32960 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
32963 \begin_layout Subsection
32964 Enabling AMS-Support
32967 \begin_layout Standard
32968 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
32969 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
32985 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
32986 selecting the checkbox
32989 \begin_inset space ~
32993 \begin_inset space ~
32997 \begin_inset space ~
33006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33010 \begin_inset Index idx
33015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33034 \begin_inset space ~
33040 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
33041 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33042 -errors in formulas,
33043 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
33046 \begin_layout Subsection
33048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33050 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
33055 \begin_inset Index idx
33060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33062 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33066 Multi-line Equations
33079 \begin_layout Standard
33080 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33081 provides a selection of different formula types.
33083 allows you to choose between
33108 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
33110 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33118 for an explanation of these formula types.
33121 \begin_layout Chapter
33125 \begin_layout Section
33127 \begin_inset Index idx
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33141 name "sec:Cross-References"
33148 \begin_layout Standard
33149 One of \SpecialChar LyX
33150 's strengths is cross-references.
33151 You can reference every section,
33155 and list in the document.
33156 To reference a document part,
33157 you have to insert a label into it.
33158 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
33159 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
33162 \begin_layout Enumerate
33166 \begin_layout Enumerate
33167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33169 name "enu:Second-item"
33176 \begin_layout Enumerate
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
33183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33186 or by pressing the toolbar button
33193 A gray label box like this:
33195 \begin_inset Graphics
33196 filename clipart/label.png
33200 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
33202 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
33203 in our case the text
33204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33237 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
33239 if you insert a label into a section heading,
33240 the suggested prefix will be
33241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33255 \begin_layout Standard
33256 To reference the item,
33257 we refer to its label using the menu
33259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33262 or the toolbar button
33265 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
33269 A gray cross-reference box like this:
33271 \begin_inset Graphics
33272 filename clipart/reference.png
33276 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
33277 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
33278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33290 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
33293 \begin_layout Standard
33294 As an alternative to
33296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33300 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
33305 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
33307 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33319 \begin_layout Standard
33320 Here is our cross-reference:
33322 \begin_inset space ~
33326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33328 reference "enu:Second-item"
33336 \begin_layout Standard
33337 It is recommended to use a
33338 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
33340 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
33347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33348 described in section
33349 \begin_inset space ~
33353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33355 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
33365 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
33368 \begin_layout Standard
33369 There are eight formats of cross-references:
33372 \begin_layout Description
33375 this is the default:
33377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33379 reference "fig:Two-images"
33387 \begin_layout Description
33389 prints the number within two parentheses,
33390 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33391 especially when the reference name
33392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33403 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33411 \begin_layout Description
33413 prints the page number:
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33420 LatexCommand pageref
33421 reference "fig:Two-images"
33429 \begin_layout Description
33431 \begin_inset space ~
33435 \begin_inset space ~
33439 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33442 LatexCommand vpageref
33443 reference "fig:Two-images"
33449 \begin_inset Newline newline
33452 If the label is on the same page,
33453 it prints “on this page”;
33454 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33455 it prints “on the facing page”;
33456 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33457 it prints “on the previous page”;
33458 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33459 it prints “on the next page”.
33460 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33463 \begin_layout Description
33465 \begin_inset space ~
33469 \begin_inset space ~
33473 \begin_inset space ~
33478 the text “on page” and the page number:
33480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33482 reference "fig:Two-images"
33488 \begin_inset Newline newline
33491 If the label is on the same page,
33492 this format behaves like
33499 otherwise it behaves like
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33516 \begin_layout Description
33518 \begin_inset space ~
33522 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
33523 \begin_inset Newline newline
33527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33536 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33546 \begin_inset Index idx
33551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33554 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33569 \begin_inset Index idx
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33577 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33597 \begin_inset Newline newline
33600 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
33601 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
33603 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
33607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33608 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33616 is the default and preferred because
33620 supports only English documents.
33621 The format is specified by using the command
33625 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33634 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33635 preamble of the document.
33636 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
33637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33653 \begin_inset Newline newline
33660 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
33665 \begin_inset Newline newline
33676 predefines reference formats for all available types.
33677 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
33678 So if you want to make formatted references to,
33681 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
33687 you might do so as follows:
33688 \begin_inset Newline newline
33695 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33696 format{prop}{Proposition
33701 \begin_inset Newline newline
33704 For more information about defining formatted references,
33705 have a look at the package documentation
33706 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33708 key "prettyref,refstyle"
33714 \begin_inset Newline newline
33725 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
33732 \begin_layout Description
33734 \begin_inset space ~
33738 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
33740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33741 LatexCommand nameref
33742 reference "fig:Two-images"
33750 \begin_layout Description
33752 \begin_inset space ~
33756 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33757 label for the reference:
33759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33760 LatexCommand labelonly
33761 reference "fig:Two-images"
33767 \begin_inset Newline newline
33770 This allows for customization,
33771 using \SpecialChar TeX
33773 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
33780 then you may want to use the
33783 \begin_inset space ~
33789 which will output only the part of the reference following the
33790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33798 This is the form needed for e.
33799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33803 \begin_inset space \space{}
33810 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33812 The varieties are adjusted in the field
33816 of the cross-reference window,
33817 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
33820 \begin_layout Standard
33821 You can only use the style
33825 to reference numbered document parts,
33826 while the reference style
33830 is always possible.
33833 \begin_layout Standard
33834 If you want to reference a section,
33835 put the label in the section heading;
33836 for floats put the label in the caption;
33837 for footnotes put the label in it.
33838 Referencing formulas is explained in section
33839 \begin_inset space ~
33843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33845 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
33853 \begin_layout Standard
33854 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
33858 \begin_inset space ~
33862 \begin_inset space ~
33867 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
33868 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
33869 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label.)
33871 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
33874 \begin_inset space ~
33879 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
33880 You can also go back with the toolbar button
33883 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
33887 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
33892 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33893 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
33901 \begin_layout Standard
33902 You can change labels at any time.
33903 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
33904 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
33906 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
33907 change them all manually
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33913 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
33914 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
33915 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 References are described in detail in the section
33930 \begin_layout Section
33931 Table of Contents and other Listings
33932 \begin_inset Index idx
33937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33944 \begin_inset Index idx
33949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33951 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33966 \begin_inset Index idx
33971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33987 \begin_layout Subsection
33989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33991 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
33998 \begin_layout Standard
33999 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
34001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34002 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34008 \begin_inset space ~
34014 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
34016 If you click on it,
34022 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
34023 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
34024 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
34026 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34033 that is described in section
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34040 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
34048 \begin_layout Standard
34049 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
34050 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
34051 as described in section
34052 \begin_inset space ~
34056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34058 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
34064 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
34066 \begin_inset space ~
34070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34072 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34077 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
34078 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
34081 \begin_layout Subsection
34084 Listings and Algorithms
34085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34087 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
34094 \begin_layout Standard
34097 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
34098 You can insert them via the
34100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34101 List/Contents/References
34104 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
34107 \begin_layout Section
34108 URLs and Hyperlinks
34109 \begin_inset Index idx
34114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34121 \begin_inset Index idx
34126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34135 \begin_layout Subsection
34137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34146 \begin_layout Standard
34147 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
34149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34156 Here is an example URL:
34160 \begin_inset Flex URL
34163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34165 https://www.lyx.org
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34175 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535921
34176 You cannot change the style of the link text
34177 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535924
34181 the URL text will always be in the style
34187 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535967
34188 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
34190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34191 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34199 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536088
34205 \begin_layout Standard
34207 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536347
34231 (use whatever the current text font is).
34232 To have italicized URLs,
34236 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34238 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536274
34250 \begin_layout Standard
34252 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536203
34253 To be able to format the URL text,
34254 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
34256 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535961
34260 \begin_layout Standard
34262 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34264 \change_deleted -712698321 1676534694
34266 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34268 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535379
34269 between lines at certain characters,
34273 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34275 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535384
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34288 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535411
34289 It does not break at a hyphen (
34294 but you can change that by adding
34299 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535339
34301 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535862
34304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34305 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34306 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
34307 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
34311 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535861
34314 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34316 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535863
34318 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535864
34320 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34322 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535842
34323 this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
34324 a last resort is to put
34327 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34331 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535846
34335 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536760
34338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34339 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34344 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535894
34345 in the preamble then the
34346 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535897
34348 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34350 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535899
34352 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34354 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535445
34356 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535903
34358 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34359 be broken at every character.
34361 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536383
34367 \begin_layout Standard
34368 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34377 URLs must not end with a backslash,
34378 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
34387 \begin_layout Subsection
34389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34391 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
34398 \begin_layout Standard
34399 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
34401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34404 or with the toolbar button
34411 The appearing dialog has two fields:
34421 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
34422 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
34424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34426 name "LyX's homepage"
34427 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34433 an Email address like this:
34435 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34437 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
34438 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
34446 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
34450 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
34451 or any other valid URI (such as
34462 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34470 \begin_layout Standard
34471 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
34472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34484 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
34486 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
34491 \begin_layout Standard
34492 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
34493 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
34494 To set the format of the link text,
34495 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
34496 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
34501 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34503 name "LyX's homepage"
34504 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34512 \begin_layout Standard
34513 The link text color can be changed,
34518 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
34520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34521 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34525 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
34526 \begin_inset Newline newline
34534 \begin_inset Newline newline
34541 in the PDF Properties dialog.
34542 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
34546 \begin_layout Section
34548 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
34550 \begin_inset Index idx
34555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34564 name "sec:Counters"
34571 \begin_layout Standard
34573 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34574 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34575 is its ability to manage counters.
34577 this is handled automatically,
34578 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
34579 This can be done in
34580 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
34582 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
34585 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34586 using the counter inset,
34587 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
34588 This allows one to set a counter's value;
34589 to reset it (to zero);
34593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34595 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
34596 Note that the section counter,
34598 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
34600 if you want the next section to be section five,
34602 then you need to set the section counter to four.
34609 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
34610 since the value added can be negative);
34612 to restore the saved value;
34613 and to print the value.
34614 These effects can also be limited to
34615 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
34617 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
34620 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34622 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
34624 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
34626 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
34629 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34635 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
34636 There are five commands you can use:
34639 \begin_layout Enumerate
34641 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
34647 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
34650 \begin_layout Enumerate
34652 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
34658 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
34659 if you choose a negative number)
34662 \begin_layout Enumerate
34664 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
34670 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
34673 \begin_layout Enumerate
34675 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
34678 Save value of counter:
34681 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
34684 \begin_layout Enumerate
34686 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
34689 Restore value of counter:
34692 Restores the previously saved value.
34695 \begin_layout Standard
34697 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
34698 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
34703 \begin_layout Section
34705 \begin_inset Index idx
34710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34719 name "sec:Appendices"
34726 \begin_layout Standard
34727 Appendices are created with the menu
34729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34735 \begin_inset space ~
34741 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
34742 This part is marked with a red borderline.
34745 \begin_layout Standard
34746 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
34747 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
34748 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
34749 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
34753 \begin_layout Standard
34755 \begin_inset space ~
34759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34761 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
34771 \begin_inset space ~
34775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34777 reference "subsec:Export"
34785 \begin_layout Section
34787 \begin_inset Index idx
34792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34801 name "sec:Bibliography"
34808 \begin_layout Standard
34809 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
34811 You can include a bibliography database,
34812 which is explained in sec.
34813 \begin_inset space ~
34817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34819 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34828 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
34829 using the paragraph environment
34834 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
34835 \begin_inset space ~
34839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34841 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
34847 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
34848 such as author-year citations,
34849 and if you have more than a handful of references,
34850 then you should seriously consider
34854 using a bibliography database.
34857 \begin_layout Standard
34858 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
34859 we use two bibliographies in this document,
34864 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
34866 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
34868 the database approach relieves you,
34869 amongst other things,
34870 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
34873 \begin_layout Subsection
34874 The Bibliography Environment
34875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34877 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34884 \begin_layout Standard
34890 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
34891 If you click on it,
34892 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
34901 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
34902 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
34903 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
34907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34909 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34912 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
34918 \begin_inset Newline newline
34922 \begin_inset Flex URL
34925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34927 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
34938 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34948 a short form of its title,
34950 \begin_inset Newline newline
34958 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
34963 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34971 \begin_layout Standard
34972 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
34974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34977 or the toolbar button
34980 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
34984 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
34985 Select one or more keys from the list and
34995 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
34996 If you click on the box,
34997 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
35000 \begin_layout Standard
35001 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
35002 Here are two examples;
35003 the first without a label,
35004 the second with the label
35005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35015 \begin_layout Standard
35019 Companion Second Edition
35023 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35025 key "latexcompanion"
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35034 The \SpecialChar LyX
35035 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
35037 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35048 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
35049 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35055 \begin_inset Index idx
35060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35063 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35080 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
35081 the label needs to be given the form
35082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35093 Author A and Author B(Year)
35094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35101 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
35108 \begin_inset space ~
35113 in the document settings
35114 \begin_inset Index idx
35119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35121 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35137 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
35139 \begin_inset space ~
35145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35147 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
35156 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35158 Once you have done that,
35162 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
35164 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35167 dialog has three input fields instead of the
35186 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
35187 the second the year (without parentheses).
35188 These two are madatory.
35189 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
35195 ) and in abrreviated form (
35203 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
35204 add the abbreviated form to
35208 and the full list to the optional
35216 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
35217 If specified like this,
35220 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
35221 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
35224 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35241 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
35245 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
35246 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
35247 In the bibliography entry,
35248 author and year must be added manually.
35253 \begin_layout Standard
35254 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
35256 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35258 \begin_inset space ~
35266 arg "layout-paragraph"
35270 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
35273 \begin_layout Subsection
35274 Bibliography databases
35275 \begin_inset Index idx
35280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35299 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35306 \begin_layout Standard
35307 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
35311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
35313 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
35318 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
35319 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
35320 This database can be used for different documents,
35321 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
35322 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
35325 \begin_layout Standard
35326 The database is a text file with the file extension
35327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35339 containing the bibliography in a special format.
35340 The format is explained in
35341 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35348 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35352 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
35358 The file can be created using any text editor,
35359 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
35360 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
35362 \begin_inset Flex URL
35365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35367 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
35375 \begin_layout Standard
35377 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
35378 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35379 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
35380 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
35381 But it has its drawbacks,
35382 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
35383 Those are addressed by
35388 \begin_inset Index idx
35393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35396 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35411 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35412 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35423 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35425 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35426 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
35436 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
35439 \begin_layout Standard
35440 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35446 set in the document settings (menu
35448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35452 \begin_inset Index idx
35457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35480 \begin_inset space ~
35485 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35493 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35494 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35496 \begin_inset Index idx
35501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35503 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35507 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35521 \begin_layout Standard
35522 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35527 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35529 \begin_inset space ~
35535 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35543 Add bibliography to TOC
35545 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
35550 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
35552 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
35557 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
35558 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
35563 \begin_layout Standard
35564 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35565 style file is a text file with the file extension
35566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35577 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
35578 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35579 distribution should provide several of these,
35580 and many publishers provide their own style files,
35581 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
35582 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
35583 but this is something for experts.
35587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35588 For information on how this is done,
35590 \begin_inset Newline newline
35594 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35596 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
35606 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35612 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
35615 \begin_layout Standard
35616 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
35619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35621 \begin_inset Index idx
35626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35628 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 \begin_inset Index idx
35648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35651 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35668 \begin_layout Standard
35669 Accessing a database via
35673 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35676 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
35678 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
35683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35684 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35692 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35693 you cannot select a
35698 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
35702 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35705 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
35707 note the following.
35712 \begin_layout Standard
35717 has two different style files:
35718 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
35719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35730 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
35731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35742 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
35743 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
35744 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
35747 \begin_layout Standard
35752 styles are not set in the
35755 \begin_inset space ~
35761 but in the document settings.
35762 \begin_inset Index idx
35767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35769 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35784 in the dialog in the
35789 which is only visible if you use
35794 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
35795 These options are described in detail in the
35801 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35811 \begin_layout Standard
35812 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
35813 \begin_inset space ~
35817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35819 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35831 Bibliography Processors
35834 \begin_layout Standard
35835 To generate the bibliography from a database,
35837 uses a bibliography processor,
35838 that is an external program that reads the database,
35839 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
35840 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35842 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
35843 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
35847 \begin_layout Standard
35849 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
35850 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
35851 You can do this on a general level in
35853 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35854 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35855 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35858 or for individual documents in
35860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35861 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35865 The following variants are available by default:
35868 \begin_layout Description
35871 \begin_inset Index idx
35876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35879 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35893 developed exclusively for
35897 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35903 provides full Unicode support,
35904 unlimited memory and many specific features
35914 it is strongly recommended to use
35921 \begin_layout Description
35922 bibtex the standard;
35923 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
35925 works with all bibliography packages,
35926 although it will probably fail with
35930 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
35933 \begin_layout Description
35934 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
35940 works with all bibliography packages,
35941 although more complex
35945 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
35950 features are supported.
35953 \begin_layout Standard
35954 By default (with the
35960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35961 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35974 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35975 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35976 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35981 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
35994 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35995 -based bibliography styles).
35996 This should suit most needs.
35999 \begin_layout Standard
36000 In Japanese documents,
36001 a specific processor is used.
36002 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
36003 (in \SpecialChar LyX
36009 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36010 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
36011 You can adjust it in
36013 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36014 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36015 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36021 \begin_layout Standard
36022 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
36023 Before adding options,
36024 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36045 \begin_layout Standard
36047 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
36048 These are explained in detail in section
36050 Customizing Bibliographies
36054 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36059 Additional Features
36062 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
36066 \begin_layout Subsection
36068 \begin_inset Index idx
36073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36075 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36092 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
36099 \begin_layout Standard
36100 Many different citation formats are common,
36102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36106 \begin_inset space \space{}
36109 numerical citation (as
36110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36117 like in this document),
36118 alpha-numerical citations (as
36119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36126 ) or author-year citations (as
36127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36136 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
36139 \begin_layout Standard
36140 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
36143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36144 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36148 \begin_inset Index idx
36153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36155 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36169 you have a range of other options,
36170 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
36175 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36190 \begin_inset space ~
36195 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
36196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36198 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36206 \begin_layout Standard
36207 With a bibliography database (see
36208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36210 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36218 ) one has in contrary to the
36222 environment full access to the formatting styles.
36223 These style formats are available:
36226 \begin_layout Description
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36231 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36232 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
36235 \begin_layout Description
36236 Biblatex loads the package
36241 \begin_inset Index idx
36246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36249 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36263 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
36265 Biblatex citation style
36269 Biblatex bibliography style
36272 Options to the package
36276 can be entered in the
36283 \begin_layout Description
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36289 \begin_inset space ~
36292 mode) loads the package
36296 with the natbib compatibility mode.
36297 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
36308 behavior very closely.
36313 this option has some additional styles.
36318 styles are also supported by this variant.
36321 \begin_layout Description
36323 \begin_inset space ~
36326 (BibTeX) loads the package
36331 \begin_inset Index idx
36336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36339 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36353 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
36356 \begin_layout Description
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36361 (BibTeX) loads the package
36366 \begin_inset Index idx
36371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36374 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36388 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
36391 \begin_layout Standard
36400 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
36401 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
36411 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
36413 Whether the output uses numerical,
36414 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
36416 Biblatex citation style
36420 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
36421 a suitable style is proposed.
36428 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
36431 \begin_layout Standard
36432 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
36433 multiple style variants are available in the
36438 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
36439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36454 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
36455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36459 \begin_inset space \space{}
36463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36474 \begin_layout Standard
36475 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
36477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36481 \begin_inset space \space{}
36485 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
36486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36490 \begin_inset space \space{}
36494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36506 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36524 Here is a simple example where the text
36525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36529 \begin_inset space ~
36533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36536 appears after the reference:
36539 \begin_layout Quote
36541 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36544 key "latexcompanion"
36552 \begin_layout Standard
36553 All styles except for
36557 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
36558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36566 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
36567 if the style requires this.
36570 \begin_layout Standard
36571 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
36572 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
36573 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
36574 the postnote will follow the last.
36579 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
36580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36583 qualified citation lists
36584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36590 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
36594 dialog will display three columns in the field
36602 \begin_inset space ~
36611 \begin_inset space ~
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36625 If you double-click on an item's
36628 \begin_inset space ~
36636 \begin_inset space ~
36642 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
36645 General text before
36651 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
36654 \begin_layout Subsection
36656 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
36657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36659 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
36663 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
36667 \begin_layout Standard
36669 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
36671 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
36674 \begin_inset space ~
36678 \begin_inset space ~
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36686 \begin_inset space ~
36689 Content\SpecialChar ldots
36692 context menu if specific conditions are met:
36695 \begin_layout Itemize
36697 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
36698 If citation entries include any of the fields
36699 \begin_inset Flex Code
36702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36704 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36713 \begin_inset Flex Code
36716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36718 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36726 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
36728 \begin_inset Flex Code
36731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36733 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36741 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
36746 \begin_inset Flex Code
36749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36751 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36760 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
36763 \begin_layout Itemize
36765 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
36766 If citation entries include any of the fields
36767 \begin_inset Flex Code
36770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36772 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36780 (filled by JabRef) or
36781 \begin_inset Flex Code
36784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36786 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36794 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
36795 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
36796 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
36799 \begin_layout Standard
36801 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36802 In addition to that,
36804 also searches your disk for matching files if you enable
36806 Search drive for cited files
36810 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36811 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
36812 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36813 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36817 It uses the tokens supplied at
36821 in the same preferences section (by default:
36823 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
36824 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
36826 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
36828 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36829 of the file (at arbitrary position).
36831 opens the first matching file it finds.
36832 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
36833 the more systematic your file naming is,
36834 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
36835 the greater the chance this works for you.
36840 \begin_layout Standard
36842 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
36843 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
36844 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36846 \begin_inset Flex Code
36849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36851 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
36860 \begin_inset Flex Code
36863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36865 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
36874 but there are also special keys,
36875 which are documented in the
36877 Customization manual
36883 Cite format description
36890 \begin_layout Section
36892 \begin_inset Index idx
36897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36913 \begin_layout Standard
36914 An index entry is created if you use the menu
36916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36918 \begin_inset space ~
36923 or the toolbar button
36930 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
36932 \begin_inset space ~
36936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36938 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
36943 for some advanced methods)
36947 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36951 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
36953 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36957 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36962 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
36964 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36966 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
36969 the text that appears in the index
36970 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36971 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
36974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36981 index inset in the heading above for example)
36984 The word where the cursor is in
36985 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36989 or the currently highlighted text
36990 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
36994 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
36996 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
37000 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37006 copied into the inset)
37011 \begin_layout Standard
37013 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
37014 (which prints out the index in your document)
37017 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
37018 in the document with
37019 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
37024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37025 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37033 A light blue box labeled
37034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37045 will show the place where the index
37046 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
37048 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
37052 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
37057 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
37060 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
37062 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
37065 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
37067 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
37069 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
37071 as there are no settings to make.
37072 This changes if you select
37073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37076 Use multiple indexes
37077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37081 \begin_inset space ~
37085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37087 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37097 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
37098 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
37104 \begin_layout Standard
37106 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
37108 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
37110 you can customize index entries to look different.
37111 You can group index entries hierarchically,
37112 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
37113 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
37114 or additionally to,
37116 you can format the page reference (e.
37117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37121 make it bold for specific pages),
37122 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
37123 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
37125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37137 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
37142 \begin_layout Standard
37144 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
37145 give a short overview of
37146 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
37150 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
37151 these features in turn
37152 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
37155 in the next subsections.
37156 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37157 's index mechanism,
37158 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37162 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
37170 \begin_layout Subsection
37172 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
37173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37175 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37181 Grouping Index Entries
37182 \begin_inset Index idx
37187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37189 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37206 \begin_layout Standard
37207 Index entries are often
37208 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
37211 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
37212 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
37213 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
37219 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37226 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37236 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
37237 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
37240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37241 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37251 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
37252 Maximally two such subentry insets,
37254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37258 three levels of grouping in total,
37259 are allowed per index entry.
37260 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
37261 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
37262 In the \SpecialChar LyX
37264 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
37269 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37278 \begin_layout Standard
37280 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
37282 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
37283 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
37284 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37285 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
37286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37294 First we create the entry
37295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37303 \begin_inset space ~
37307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37309 reference "subsec:Lists"
37315 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
37316 \begin_inset space ~
37320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37322 reference "sec:Itemize"
37328 we insert the command
37331 \begin_layout Standard
37333 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37339 \begin_layout Standard
37341 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37345 \begin_layout Standard
37347 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37353 \begin_layout Standard
37355 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37356 for the enumerated list in section
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37363 reference "sec:Enumerate"
37373 \begin_layout Standard
37375 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
37376 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37378 subentries are indicated by a preceding
37379 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
37383 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
37387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37395 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
37397 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
37399 although you have to take care that the character is not
37402 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
37405 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37413 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
37419 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
37420 marks the grouping levels.
37424 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
37425 You can have three levels;
37426 every index level is indented a bit more.
37427 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
37428 If we don't have an index entry for
37429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37437 it will be printed anyway,
37438 but without a page number.
37443 \begin_layout Subsection
37445 \begin_inset Index idx
37450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37452 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37469 \begin_layout Standard
37471 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
37473 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
37477 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
37478 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
37479 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
37480 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
37484 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
37486 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
37490 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
37491 index more pages under the same entry
37492 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
37493 refer to a page range instead,
37494 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
37495 one that marks the beginning of the range,
37496 the other that marks its end
37500 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
37501 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
37502 To mark start and end,
37503 select the respective
37507 option in the index inset settings dialog.
37508 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
37509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37527 \begin_layout Standard
37529 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
37530 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
37531 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
37532 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
37535 \begin_layout Standard
37537 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37539 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
37540 we create an index entry in section
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37547 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
37555 \begin_layout Standard
37557 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37560 Paragraph environments|(
37563 \begin_layout Standard
37565 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37566 and another entry at the end of section
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37573 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
37581 \begin_layout Standard
37583 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37586 Paragraph environments|)
37589 \begin_layout Standard
37591 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37616 respectively start and end the index range.
37617 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
37618 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
37619 An example is the index entry
37620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37633 \begin_layout Subsection
37635 \begin_inset Index idx
37640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37642 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37659 \begin_layout Standard
37660 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
37661 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
37668 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
37669 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
37671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37683 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
37684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37696 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
37697 \begin_inset space ~
37701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37703 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37725 \begin_layout Standard
37727 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
37728 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
37731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37732 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37738 \begin_layout Standard
37740 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
37741 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
37744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37745 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37757 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
37758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37778 \begin_layout Standard
37780 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37781 We referred for example in the index entry
37782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37796 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
37801 ) to the index entry
37802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37809 in the same section using the entry
37812 \begin_layout Standard
37814 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37817 GIF|see{Image formats}
37820 \begin_layout Standard
37822 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37823 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37825 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
37826 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
37831 \begin_layout Subsection
37833 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
37834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37836 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
37843 \begin_inset Index idx
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37850 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37867 \begin_layout Standard
37869 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
37870 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
37871 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
37876 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
37879 f you use accented characters in the index entry
37880 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
37881 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
37882 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
37883 or if you use macros
37886 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
37890 \begin_layout Standard
37892 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
37893 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
37898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
37901 \begin_inset space ~
37905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37907 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
37917 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
37918 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
37919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37945 \begin_inset Index idx
37950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37952 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37967 \begin_inset Index idx
37972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37989 \begin_inset Index idx
37994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38001 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
38003 maison but we want the order maïs,
38010 \begin_layout Standard
38012 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38015 previous entry@current entry
38018 \begin_layout Standard
38020 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38021 In our case we want to have
38022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38037 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
38040 \begin_layout Standard
38042 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38048 \begin_layout Standard
38050 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38051 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
38052 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
38054 See the next subsection for an example.
38055 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
38059 \begin_layout Standard
38061 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
38062 To accommodate for that,
38065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38066 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38070 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
38071 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
38073 you can pass the sort key
38074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38085 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
38088 \begin_layout Standard
38090 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
38091 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38093 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
38094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38102 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38104 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
38106 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38114 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38124 \begin_layout Subsection
38126 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
38128 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
38132 \begin_inset Index idx
38137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38139 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38156 \begin_layout Standard
38158 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
38160 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
38163 he appearance of index entries
38164 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
38165 can be formatted as usual
38167 via the text style dialog
38168 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
38170 the toolbar or shortcuts.
38171 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
38174 \begin_inset Index idx
38179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38181 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38187 This is an italic dummy entry
38198 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
38199 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
38201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38214 will be listed separately.
38216 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38218 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
38222 \begin_layout Standard
38224 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38228 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38230 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38234 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38240 option in the index entry settings dialog.
38242 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38243 number using the character
38244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38251 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38252 -command without a backslash.
38253 We can write for example
38254 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
38255 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
38275 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
38282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38286 a self-defined command
38287 \begin_inset Flex Code
38290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38292 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
38300 or an existing macro such as
38301 \begin_inset Flex Code
38304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38306 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
38319 \begin_layout Standard
38321 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38324 italic page number:|textit
38327 \begin_layout Standard
38329 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38330 to get the page number in italic.
38331 \begin_inset Index idx
38336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38338 italic page number:|textit
38343 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
38344 -commands begin with a backslash,
38345 but in this special case
38346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38362 \begin_inset space ~
38368 Have a look at section
38369 \begin_inset space ~
38373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38375 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38380 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38386 \begin_layout Standard
38388 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
38389 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38398 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
38402 to generate the index,
38404 \begin_inset space ~
38408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38410 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38421 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
38426 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
38428 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38431 key "latexcompanion"
38446 \begin_layout Standard
38448 we encourage you to
38449 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
38450 not format page numbers directly as shown above
38451 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
38452 use self-defined commands
38456 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
38457 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
38458 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
38460 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
38462 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
38463 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
38464 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
38467 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
38471 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
38472 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
38473 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
38474 definition of the indexed term,
38475 so that users can easily find definitions.
38477 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
38481 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
38484 the following in the preamble
38487 \begin_layout Standard
38493 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
38495 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
38501 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
38509 \begin_layout Standard
38511 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
38513 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38514 add the custom formatting
38515 \begin_inset Flex Code
38518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38528 to the respective entry settings dialog.
38533 \begin_layout Standard
38535 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38541 \begin_layout Standard
38543 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38544 in the index entry.
38545 \begin_inset Index idx
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38557 The advantage is that,
38559 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
38560 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
38563 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
38564 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
38565 not every single index entry.
38566 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38570 \begin_layout Standard
38572 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38578 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
38584 If you use the index processor
38590 makeindex or xindex
38593 \begin_inset space ~
38597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38599 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38605 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
38610 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
38611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38618 (style file) you use before they can be used.
38620 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
38623 \begin_layout Verbatim
38625 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
38627 (markup-locref :open "
38629 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
38632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38634 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
38636 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38639 key "latexcompanion"
38654 \begin_layout Standard
38655 You can also change the layout
38656 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
38658 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
38664 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
38666 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
38670 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
38674 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
38678 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
38681 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
38684 get a bold font for all index entries.
38686 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
38689 it is better (and required for
38690 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
38693 more advanced tasks
38694 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
38698 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
38701 to set up a so-called
38704 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
38728 ) to determine the formatting;
38729 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
38734 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
38736 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
38742 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
38749 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
38757 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
38765 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
38770 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
38772 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38774 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
38780 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
38782 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38784 key "makeindex,xindy"
38793 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
38794 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
38795 packages available that ease such formatting,
38797 \begin_inset Flex URL
38800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38802 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
38804 https://ctan.org/topic/index
38814 \begin_layout Subsection
38816 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
38817 Special Characters in Index Entries
38818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38820 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38827 \begin_layout Standard
38829 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
38830 As already mentioned above,
38831 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
38834 \begin_inset Flex Code
38837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
38849 \begin_inset Flex Code
38852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38854 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
38864 \begin_inset Flex Code
38867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38869 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
38870 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38882 \begin_inset Flex Code
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38887 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
38896 If you use them literally,
38897 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
38899 you will not get the character itself.
38902 \begin_layout Standard
38904 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
38905 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
38907 \begin_inset Quotes els
38911 \begin_inset Quotes ers
38915 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
38917 the escape character is
38918 \begin_inset Flex Code
38921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38923 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
38924 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38934 (but this can be changed).
38936 \begin_inset Flex Code
38939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38941 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
38942 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38954 \begin_inset Flex Code
38957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38959 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
38960 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38972 \begin_inset Flex Code
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38977 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
38978 \begin_inset Quotes qld
38982 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
38994 \begin_inset Flex Code
38997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38999 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
39000 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39010 to get the special character you want.
39011 Note that the escape character,
39013 \begin_inset Flex Code
39016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39018 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
39019 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39034 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
39035 \begin_inset space ~
39039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39041 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39051 \begin_layout Subsection
39053 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39056 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
39060 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
39063 \begin_layout Standard
39065 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
39066 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
39067 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
39068 This is not only time-consuming,
39069 but also error-prone;
39071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39075 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
39077 provides some functions to ease the task.
39080 \begin_layout Standard
39082 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39084 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
39085 you can open the outliner via
39087 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39097 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
39107 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
39108 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
39113 it will be more easier),
39118 -click on the entry and select
39120 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
39122 from the context menu.
39123 This will do just what it says:
39124 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
39127 \begin_layout Standard
39129 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
39132 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
39133 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
39134 you can select from the context menu
39136 Index All Occurrences of this Word
39139 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
39140 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
39141 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
39142 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
39146 is the word before the index entry,
39151 will be considered as well,
39157 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
39159 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
39160 but only relevant occurrences!
39161 So as convenient as this function might seem,
39162 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
39164 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
39167 \begin_layout Subsection
39169 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
39171 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
39175 \begin_inset Index idx
39180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39182 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39199 name "subsec:Index-Program"
39206 \begin_layout Standard
39208 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
39210 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
39217 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
39226 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
39234 for index generation;
39235 otherwise the program
39240 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
39243 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
39248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39250 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
39256 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39257 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39258 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
39259 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
39261 if you are writing in another than the English language,
39276 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
39277 As a further option,
39278 you can select the rather new
39285 \begin_layout Itemize
39287 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
39293 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39294 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39295 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
39297 \begin_inset space ~
39301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39303 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
39309 how to manually fix this sorting,
39310 but this is very tedious work).
39313 \begin_layout Itemize
39315 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
39316 The alternative program,
39322 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
39323 It can sort most languages correctly,
39324 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
39330 is no longer actively maintained,
39331 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
39337 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
39338 But if you have it available,
39339 it is almost always a better option than
39346 \begin_layout Itemize
39348 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
39355 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
39356 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
39357 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
39358 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
39360 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
39361 The program is still in development,
39362 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
39363 But the program is definitely worth a try,
39368 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
39373 \begin_layout Standard
39375 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
39377 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
39381 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
39383 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
39386 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
39387 's preferences dialog,
39389 \begin_inset space ~
39393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39395 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
39401 The available options are listed and explained in
39402 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
39404 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39406 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
39412 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
39414 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39416 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
39426 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
39428 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
39432 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
39434 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39437 alternative program
39438 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39441 to generate the index.
39444 \begin_layout Standard
39445 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
39446 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
39449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39454 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
39457 \begin_layout Subsection
39459 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
39460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39462 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
39471 \begin_layout Standard
39472 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
39474 you might need to set up a separate
39475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39482 next to the standard index.
39484 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
39485 but there are packages that add this feature.
39492 \begin_inset Index idx
39497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39500 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39514 package to generate multiple indexes.
39515 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
39520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 If yours does not ship it,
39522 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
39525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39533 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39535 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
39536 Please consult the package's manual for details.
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39545 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
39546 for the use of multiple indexes,
39549 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39550 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39553 and select the option
39555 Use multiple Indexes
39562 already contains the standard index
39563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39571 To add further indexes,
39572 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
39576 input field and press the
39581 The new index now also appears in the list.
39583 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
39584 label color to the new index.
39587 \begin_layout Standard
39588 Once the document changes have been applied,
39589 you can find the new index list in
39591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39592 List/Contents/References
39598 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
39599 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
39600 but there are additional features:
39603 \begin_layout Itemize
39604 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
39605 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
39608 \begin_layout Itemize
39609 By right-clicking on an index,
39610 you can change its type.
39612 you can specify an index to be a
39618 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
39620 if you use a book class,
39621 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
39622 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
39625 \begin_layout Itemize
39630 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
39631 code in the name of the index.
39634 \begin_layout Section
39635 Nomenclature/Glossary
39636 \begin_inset Index idx
39641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39648 \begin_inset Index idx
39653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39655 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
39658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39672 name "sec:Nomenclature"
39679 \begin_layout Standard
39680 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
39683 \begin_layout Standard
39684 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
39685 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39691 \begin_inset Index idx
39696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39699 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39714 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39717 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39724 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39728 \begin_layout Standard
39729 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
39731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39742 or the toolbar button
39745 arg "nomencl-insert"
39750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39761 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
39764 \begin_layout Standard
39765 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
39766 The first is the term or
39770 that you wish to define.
39775 of the term or symbol.
39778 \begin_layout Standard
39779 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39788 To use \SpecialChar TeX
39789 code for nomenclature entries the option
39793 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39802 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
39803 \begin_inset Index idx
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39810 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39827 \begin_layout Standard
39828 If you have symbols in formulas,
39829 you have to define them in the
39833 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
39836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39840 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39849 \begin_inset Newline newline
39857 \begin_inset Newline newline
39863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39870 character starts/ends the formula.
39871 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
39872 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
39873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39883 For capital Greek letters,
39884 start the command also with a capital letter,
39894 \begin_layout Standard
39895 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39896 syntax is given in section
39897 \begin_inset space ~
39901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39903 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
39911 \begin_layout Standard
39915 \begin_inset space ~
39920 dialog to format the description text;
39921 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
39923 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
39924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39928 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39935 in this document is:
39936 \begin_inset Newline newline
39941 dummy entry for the character
39946 \begin_inset Newline newline
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39968 font use the command
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40000 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
40001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40005 \begin_inset space \space{}
40009 \begin_inset Newline newline
40025 \begin_inset Newline newline
40028 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
40029 This command will make the font of all symbols
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_layout Standard
40045 If the characters |
40046 \begin_inset space \space{}
40050 \begin_inset space \space{}
40054 \begin_inset space \space{}
40059 \begin_inset space \space{}
40063 \begin_inset space \space{}
40066 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
40067 code they need to be escaped by adding a
40068 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
40070 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
40073 character in front of them.
40074 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
40076 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40077 LatexCommand nomenclature
40078 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
40079 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
40085 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
40087 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40088 LatexCommand nomenclature
40089 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
40090 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
40100 \begin_layout Subsection
40101 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
40102 \begin_inset Index idx
40107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40109 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40126 \begin_layout Standard
40127 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40128 -code of the symbol definition.
40129 This leads to undesired results when you,
40131 have symbols in formulas.
40132 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
40135 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40136 LatexCommand nomenclature
40138 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
40146 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40150 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40151 LatexCommand nomenclature
40154 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
40160 They will be sorted by
40161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40187 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40190 will be sorted before the
40194 since the character
40195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40202 is considered in sorting.
40205 \begin_layout Standard
40206 To control the sort order,
40210 \begin_inset space ~
40215 field of the nomenclature dialog.
40216 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
40217 For the example given,
40222 in this field for the
40223 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40231 will be located before
40232 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40238 \begin_layout Standard
40239 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
40245 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40255 \begin_layout Subsection
40256 Nomenclature Options
40257 \begin_inset Index idx
40262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40264 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40281 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
40288 \begin_layout Standard
40293 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
40294 Here are some of its options;
40295 for more have a look at its documentation:
40298 \begin_layout Description
40299 refeq Appends the phrase
40300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40316 to every nomenclature entry,
40323 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
40326 \begin_layout Description
40327 refpage Appends the phrase
40328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40344 to every nomenclature entry,
40351 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
40354 \begin_layout Description
40355 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
40358 \begin_layout Standard
40359 To use one or more of the options,
40360 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
40362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40366 In this document the options
40374 \begin_layout Standard
40375 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40382 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
40386 field in the nomenclature dialog:
40389 \begin_layout Description
40399 \begin_layout Description
40402 nomrefpage Like the
40409 \begin_layout Description
40412 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
40421 \begin_layout Description
40425 \begin_inset space ~
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40436 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
40439 \begin_layout Standard
40441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40448 are automatically translated for most document languages.
40450 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
40454 \begin_layout Standard
40463 \begin_inset Newline newline
40469 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40473 \begin_inset space ~
40489 \begin_inset Newline newline
40496 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40497 \begin_inset Newline newline
40503 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40525 \begin_layout Standard
40526 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
40527 assure that you use
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40535 in the document settings under
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40546 \begin_layout Standard
40554 \begin_inset Newline newline
40558 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40575 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
40577 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
40578 \begin_inset Newline newline
40585 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40586 \begin_inset Newline newline
40590 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40607 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
40612 \begin_layout Subsection
40613 Printing the Nomenclature
40614 \begin_inset Index idx
40619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40621 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40638 \begin_layout Standard
40639 To print the nomenclature,
40642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40643 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
40648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40659 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
40660 By right-clicking on it,
40661 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
40662 You can choose between these settings:
40665 \begin_layout Description
40666 Default a space of 1
40667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40673 \begin_layout Description
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40682 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
40685 \begin_layout Description
40686 Custom custom space
40689 \begin_layout Standard
40690 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
40691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40699 If you are not happy with the name,
40700 you can change it by redefining the command
40708 in order to change the name to
40713 add the following line to the preamble:
40716 \begin_layout Standard
40729 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
40732 \begin_layout Standard
40733 When you are using another document language than English,
40735 \begin_inset Newline newline
40751 where *** is the name of the language used.
40754 \begin_layout Subsection
40755 Nomenclature Program
40756 \begin_inset Index idx
40761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40763 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40780 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
40787 \begin_layout Standard
40794 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
40796 to generate the nomenclature.
40798 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40810 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
40816 The available options are listed and explained in
40817 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40819 key "nomencl,makeindex"
40827 \begin_layout Section
40829 \begin_inset Index idx
40834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40841 \begin_inset Index idx
40846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40848 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40865 name "sec:Branches"
40872 \begin_layout Standard
40873 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
40874 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
40875 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
40878 \begin_layout Standard
40879 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
40880 allows you to put text into branches.
40881 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
40882 To create a branch,
40883 either select the menu
40885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40886 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
40889 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
40891 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40899 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
40900 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
40901 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
40902 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
40904 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
40905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40917 \begin_inset space ~
40920 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
40921 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
40924 \begin_layout Standard
40925 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
40926 These boxes are inserted via the menu
40928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40931 where you can choose a branch.
40932 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
40935 \begin_layout Standard
40936 Here is an example,
40937 where only the question text appears,
40938 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
40941 \begin_layout Standard
40942 \begin_inset Branch Question
40946 \begin_layout Standard
40952 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
40960 \begin_layout Standard
40961 \begin_inset Branch Answer
40965 \begin_layout Standard
40971 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
40979 \begin_layout Standard
40986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40991 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
40992 Consider for example a file
40993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41000 which has the above branches.
41002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41010 the PDF export file would be called
41011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41034 branch were inactive,
41036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41073 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
41074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41077 if both branches were active.
41078 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
41079 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41085 \begin_layout Standard
41087 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
41088 It is also possible to
41089 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
41093 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
41095 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
41099 whose content is output just in case the branch is
41104 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
41105 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
41109 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
41111 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
41114 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
41115 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
41116 right-click on the inset button and choose
41119 \begin_inset space ~
41127 \begin_layout Standard
41128 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41132 \begin_layout Standard
41139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41146 branch is deactivated.
41152 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41158 \begin_layout Standard
41159 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
41160 like inside equations,
41161 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41162 definitions for each branch.
41163 For example you can define for the question branch
41167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41168 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41177 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41190 \begin_layout Standard
41200 \begin_layout Standard
41210 \begin_layout Standard
41211 and for the answer branch
41214 \begin_layout Standard
41224 \begin_layout Standard
41234 \begin_layout Standard
41235 \begin_inset Branch Question
41239 \begin_layout Standard
41243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41271 \begin_layout Standard
41272 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41276 \begin_layout Standard
41280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41308 \begin_layout Standard
41309 Now it is possible to use the
41313 question{\SpecialChar ldots
41320 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
41323 commands to obtain conditional output.
41324 Here is an example formula where only the
41331 \begin_inset Formula
41333 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
41341 \begin_layout Standard
41343 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
41351 \begin_layout Standard
41352 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
41353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41357 \begin_inset space \space{}
41360 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
41362 For this advanced usage,
41370 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41373 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
41377 \begin_layout Standard
41379 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41380 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close status of all branch insets in the document we provide
41386 which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined context menu of branch inset.
41391 \begin_layout Section
41393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41395 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
41400 \begin_inset Index idx
41405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41414 \begin_layout Standard
41416 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
41421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41422 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41426 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
41429 allows you to set up
41430 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
41432 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
41436 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
41438 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
41442 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
41446 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
41451 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
41453 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
41457 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
41459 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
41462 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41464 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
41466 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
41474 \begin_inset Index idx
41479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41482 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41497 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
41498 which you need to enable by clicking
41500 Use Hyperref Support
41502 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
41503 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
41505 Customize Hyperref Options
41508 Among other things,
41510 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
41514 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
41516 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
41520 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
41524 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
41527 cross-references in the
41528 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
41532 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
41534 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
41538 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
41539 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
41543 table of contents entry or on a reference to
41544 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
41545 open a website or to
41547 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
41549 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
41551 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
41552 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
41557 \begin_layout Standard
41558 The header information in the dialog tab
41562 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
41563 Many programs are able to extract this information,
41566 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
41569 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
41570 This is very useful to sort,
41571 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41586 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
41589 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
41592 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41604 \begin_inset space ~
41609 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
41610 which is useful for presentations.
41613 \begin_layout Standard
41615 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
41617 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
41625 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
41626 you can customize the
41627 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
41629 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
41633 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
41635 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
41639 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
41641 and you can specify
41644 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
41646 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
41647 will look and if links for
41649 bibliographical backreferences are created
41650 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
41656 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
41657 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41676 option allows long links to be split;
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41688 \begin_inset space ~
41696 \begin_inset space ~
41701 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
41705 \begin_inset space ~
41710 colors the different links.
41711 The default colors are:
41714 \begin_layout Labeling
41715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41720 for hyperlinks and URLs
41723 \begin_layout Labeling
41724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41732 \begin_layout Labeling
41733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41741 \begin_layout Standard
41742 but you can change these in the
41743 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
41745 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
41751 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
41753 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
41760 in this document they were changed with the
41761 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
41765 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
41775 \begin_layout Quote
41784 \begin_layout Standard
41786 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
41792 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
41794 depending on the option selected,
41795 the number of the section,
41796 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
41801 \begin_layout Standard
41806 you can specify if PDF
41807 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
41809 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
41813 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
41814 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
41816 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
41817 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
41819 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
41821 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
41825 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
41831 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
41833 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
41835 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
41838 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
41846 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
41847 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
41848 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
41849 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41856 2 will display all sections and subsections,
41858 \begin_inset space ~
41861 1 will only display the sections
41862 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
41863 (collapsing the rest)
41866 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
41870 \begin_layout Standard
41872 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
41877 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
41878 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41885 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
41886 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
41887 \begin_inset Flex Code
41890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
41903 not via the package options.
41904 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
41905 If you need to use one of those options,
41906 you can set them by adding
41909 \begin_layout Quote
41911 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
41914 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
41915 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
41917 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
41923 \begin_layout Standard
41925 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
41928 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41929 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41932 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
41937 \begin_layout Standard
41939 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
41944 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
41946 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
41947 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
41948 input is simply ignored).
41949 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
41955 At the point of writing this,
41956 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
41958 documentmetadata-support.pdf
41961 but it is expected that in the future,
41962 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
41965 \begin_layout Standard
41967 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
41968 PDF properties are also used in this document.
41969 When you look in its document settings,
41970 you can see that some additional
41975 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
41976 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41988 \begin_layout Section
41990 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41994 name "sec:TeX-Code"
42001 \begin_layout Subsection
42004 \begin_inset Index idx
42009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42019 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42026 \begin_layout Standard
42027 As \SpecialChar LyX
42028 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
42030 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
42031 commands and constructs,
42034 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
42035 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
42036 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42037 -package for every problem,
42038 though \SpecialChar LyX
42039 cannot support all packages and their commands.
42042 \begin_layout Standard
42044 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
42045 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
42046 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
42049 Code box is created by the menu
42051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42058 or by the toolbar button
42071 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
42078 \begin_layout Standard
42079 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
42081 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
42084 if you want to draw a frame around a word
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42089 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
42094 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42102 you can write the command part
42108 in a \SpecialChar TeX
42109 Code box before the word and the closing brace
42113 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
42114 Code box behind the word.
42115 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
42116 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
42119 \begin_layout Standard
42120 \begin_inset Graphics
42121 filename clipart/ERT.png
42129 \begin_layout Standard
42133 \begin_layout Standard
42134 This is a line with a
42138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42161 \begin_layout Standard
42162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42171 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42172 -commands without parameters,
42173 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
42174 know that the command is finished.
42182 \begin_layout Subsection
42183 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42185 \begin_inset Argument 1
42188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
42196 \begin_inset Index idx
42201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42211 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42218 \begin_layout Standard
42219 When you write larger documents or books,
42220 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42221 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
42222 uses in the background.
42223 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
42224 is based on commands,
42226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42234 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
42236 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
42237 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
42238 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
42239 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
42242 \begin_layout Standard
42243 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
42245 As mentioned above,
42246 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42248 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42261 \begin_layout Standard
42262 As result you find that the package
42267 \begin_inset Index idx
42272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42275 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42291 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
42293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42296 \SpecialChar menuseparator
42300 \begin_inset space ~
42308 \begin_layout Standard
42313 usepackage[options]{package name}
42316 \begin_layout Standard
42317 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
42318 commands begin with a backslash,
42319 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
42320 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
42323 \begin_layout Standard
42324 In your case the package name is
42329 After a look in the documentation of the package,
42330 you know that the option
42334 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
42335 So you add the command
42338 \begin_layout Standard
42343 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
42346 \begin_layout Standard
42347 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
42351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42352 For more commands provided by the
42357 have a look at its documentation,
42359 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42374 \begin_layout Standard
42375 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
42376 For example if you use a
42381 you don't need the package
42386 you can instead write
42389 \begin_layout Standard
42394 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
42399 \begin_layout Standard
42400 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
42401 So if you plan to write a large document,
42402 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
42409 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
42412 \begin_layout Standard
42413 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
42414 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
42415 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42417 use the \SpecialChar TeX
42418 Code box as described in the previous section.
42421 \begin_layout Standard
42422 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
42424 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42428 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
42436 \begin_layout Standard
42437 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42457 \begin_inset Note Note
42460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42461 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
42469 \begin_layout Left Header
42470 \begin_inset Argument 1
42473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42493 \begin_inset Note Note
42496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42497 defines the header line as described below
42505 \begin_layout Center Header
42506 \begin_inset Argument 1
42509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42518 \begin_layout Right Header
42519 \begin_inset Argument 1
42522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42543 \begin_layout Left Footer
42544 \begin_inset Argument 1
42547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42568 \begin_layout Center Footer
42569 \begin_inset Argument 1
42572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42584 \begin_inset Newline newline
42588 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
42594 \begin_layout Right Footer
42595 \begin_inset Argument 1
42598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 \begin_layout Section
42621 Customized Page Headers and Footers
42622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42624 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
42629 \begin_inset Index idx
42634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42636 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 \begin_inset Index idx
42656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42665 \begin_layout Standard
42666 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
42667 you need to set the
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42693 As a second step add in the menu
42695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42696 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42705 Custom Header/Footerlines
42708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42712 This module offers the following 6
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_layout Description
42721 \begin_inset space ~
42725 \begin_inset space ~
42729 \begin_inset space ~
42733 \begin_inset space ~
42737 \begin_inset space ~
42743 \begin_layout Description
42745 \begin_inset space ~
42749 \begin_inset space ~
42753 \begin_inset space ~
42757 \begin_inset space ~
42761 \begin_inset space ~
42767 \begin_layout Standard
42768 for the different positions in the header/footer.
42769 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
42772 \begin_layout Standard
42774 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
42775 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
42777 \begin_inset space ~
42781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42783 reference "fig:Page-layout"
42788 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
42791 \begin_layout Standard
42792 \begin_inset Float figure
42799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42802 \begin_inset Tabular
42803 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
42804 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
42805 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42807 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42809 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
42821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42827 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42838 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42856 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42867 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
42870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42871 The normal text on the page goes here.
42872 The running header is above the text,
42873 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
42874 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
42875 title of the chapter,
42876 company logo but you can use almost anything,
42882 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42891 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42902 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42920 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42931 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
42943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42949 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42967 \begin_inset Caption Standard
42969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42972 name "fig:Page-layout"
42976 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
42989 \begin_layout Standard
42990 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42999 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
43002 \begin_inset space ~
43007 is set to “Default”.
43008 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
43016 \begin_layout Subsection
43020 \begin_layout Standard
43021 To define your header line,
43022 add all three header environments.
43023 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
43024 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
43025 For single-sided documents,
43026 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
43027 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
43028 nothing appears in the output.
43029 Defining the footer line works similarly.
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43033 For the definition,
43034 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
43035 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
43038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43040 \begin_inset space ~
43048 \begin_layout Description
43051 thepage prints the current page number
43054 \begin_layout Description
43057 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
43060 \begin_layout Description
43063 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
43066 \begin_layout Description
43069 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
43070 If the document has chapters,
43071 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
43073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43077 \begin_inset Quotes prd
43080 because it usually goes in a left header.
43083 \begin_layout Description
43086 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
43087 If the document has chapters,
43088 it prints the current section number and title instead.
43089 It is normally used in the right header.
43092 \begin_layout Subsection
43093 Default header/footer
43096 \begin_layout Standard
43097 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
43098 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
43099 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
43100 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
43101 but leave it blank.
43103 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
43107 \begin_inset space ~
43115 \begin_layout Subsection
43119 \begin_layout Standard
43120 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
43121 Some pages are different.
43122 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
43123 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
43124 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
43125 but that is normal.
43126 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
43129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43130 Header and footer decoration line
43133 \begin_layout Standard
43136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43139 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
43140 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
43152 in the following way:
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43162 headrulewidth}{thickness}
43165 \begin_layout Standard
43166 where thickness is a size in standard units like
43179 If you don't want a line,
43180 set the thickness to 0
43181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43188 The lines can also be colored,
43189 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43191 If you really need this,
43192 have a look at the Internet or in section
43193 \begin_inset space ~
43197 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43208 Several header/footer lines
43211 \begin_layout Standard
43212 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
43213 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
43215 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
43216 To expand the height,
43217 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43232 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43233 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43243 \begin_layout Standard
43250 headheight}{height}
43253 \begin_layout Standard
43258 is a size in standard units (e.
43259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43263 \begin_inset space \space{}
43271 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
43272 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
43273 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43274 logfile with the menu
43276 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43278 \begin_inset space ~
43286 \begin_inset space ~
43291 to see if you can find a warning about the package
43296 \begin_inset Index idx
43301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43304 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43319 If there is such a warning,
43320 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
43323 \begin_layout Subsection
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
43329 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
43330 This example consists of the following definition:
43333 \begin_layout Description
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43345 empty optional argument
43348 \begin_layout Description
43350 \begin_inset space ~
43354 empty optional argument
43357 \begin_layout Description
43359 \begin_inset space ~
43369 in the optional argument
43372 \begin_layout Description
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43384 in the optional argument
43387 \begin_layout Description
43389 \begin_inset space ~
43403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43407 \begin_inset Newline newline
43411 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43418 in the optional argument
43421 \begin_layout Description
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43433 empty optional argument
43436 \begin_layout Description
43439 headrulewidth set to 2
43440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43446 \begin_layout Standard
43447 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
43449 For more specialized features,
43452 see the manual of the
43458 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43468 \begin_layout Standard
43469 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
43475 \begin_layout Standard
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43483 pagestyle{headings}
43489 \begin_inset Note Note
43492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43493 switches back to page style with the default headings
43501 \begin_layout Section
43502 Previewing Snippets of your Document
43503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43505 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43510 \begin_inset Index idx
43515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43522 \begin_inset Index idx
43527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43529 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43546 \begin_layout Standard
43548 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
43551 \begin_layout Subsection
43555 \begin_layout Standard
43556 To get previews working,
43557 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43563 \begin_inset Index idx
43568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43571 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43585 (on some systems named simply
43590 If it is not already installed,
43591 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
43594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43601 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43603 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
43612 for \SpecialChar LyX
43613 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43614 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
43618 \begin_layout Subsection
43622 \begin_layout Standard
43623 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
43624 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
43626 activate the option
43629 \begin_inset space ~
43636 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43642 \begin_inset space ~
43646 \begin_inset space ~
43649 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
43656 \begin_inset space ~
43669 \begin_inset space ~
43674 is the multiplication factor for the size.
43677 \begin_layout Standard
43678 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43691 \begin_inset space ~
43699 \begin_layout Standard
43700 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
43701 and when you finish editing an inset.
43704 \begin_layout Standard
43705 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43714 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43723 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
43731 \begin_layout Subsection
43732 Selected document parts
43735 \begin_layout Standard
43736 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
43737 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
43738 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
43741 insert a preview inset via the menu
43743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43747 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
43748 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
43749 If you click on the preview,
43750 you can edit the previewed stuff.
43753 \begin_layout Standard
43755 To create rotated boxes,
43756 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43763 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
43768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43775 is explained in section
43777 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
43782 \begin_inset space ~
43792 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
43793 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
43794 the final rotated boxes,
43795 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
43796 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
43797 Here is the result:
43800 \begin_layout Standard
43801 \begin_inset Preview
43803 \begin_layout Standard
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43812 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
43818 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
43828 height_special "totalheight"
43833 backgroundcolor "none"
43836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43861 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
43867 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
43874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43889 \begin_layout Standard
43890 Previewing works also for colors.
43891 In this example a special framed,
43892 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43910 is explained in section
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43930 \begin_layout Standard
43931 \begin_inset Preview
43933 \begin_layout Standard
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43956 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
43961 This is text within a colored,
43966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43981 \begin_layout Standard
43982 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43988 \begin_layout Standard
43989 If \SpecialChar LyX
43990 does not show a preview,
43991 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
43992 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43993 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
43995 If \SpecialChar LyX
43996 cannot create a preview,
43997 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43999 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
44000 Code and don't know if it is correct,
44001 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
44004 \begin_layout Subsection
44009 \begin_layout Standard
44010 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44011 source of the whole document or parts of it.
44014 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44016 \begin_inset space ~
44021 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44023 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
44024 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
44026 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
44027 To view the whole document as source,
44028 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
44034 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
44036 but note that if you have several documents open,
44037 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
44039 not just the one which is open at the time.
44042 \begin_layout Section
44043 Advanced Find and Replace
44044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44046 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44051 \begin_inset Index idx
44056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 \begin_inset Index idx
44068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44077 \begin_layout Subsection
44081 \begin_layout Standard
44082 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
44083 allows for searching of complex,
44084 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
44086 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
44087 The key-features are:
44090 \begin_layout Itemize
44091 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
44092 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
44093 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
44094 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
44097 \begin_layout Itemize
44098 Search may be format-insensitive,
44099 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
44102 and even mathematics),
44103 or it may be format-sensitive,
44106 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
44109 \begin_layout Itemize
44110 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
44111 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
44114 \begin_layout Itemize
44115 Search may be widened to a specific
44121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44128 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
44129 all the open files,
44130 or all the manuals available from the
44137 \begin_layout Itemize
44138 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
44139 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
44140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44149 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
44152 \begin_layout Subsection
44156 \begin_layout Standard
44157 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
44159 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44172 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
44175 ) or the toolbar button
44178 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44184 Advanced Find and Replace
44189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44193 \begin_layout Standard
44199 mini-editor a simple word,
44200 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44208 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
44211 arg "paragraph-break"
44215 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
44217 bold or normal face,
44218 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
44222 arg "paragraph-break"
44225 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
44229 searches backwards.
44232 \begin_layout Standard
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44241 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
44249 \begin_inset space ~
44254 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
44257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44258 Searching for mathematics
44261 \begin_layout Standard
44262 Mathematical formulas,
44264 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
44267 or something more complex like
44268 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
44272 may be searched for by typing them in the
44277 When searching for a formula,
44278 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
44279 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
44280 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
44286 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44290 \begin_layout Standard
44291 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
44292 This is done by switching to the
44296 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
44309 \begin_layout Itemize
44310 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
44313 \begin_layout Itemize
44314 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
44315 and within the same text style only.
44318 \begin_layout Itemize
44319 a normal word in a section heading,
44320 and searching for it,
44321 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
44323 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
44324 in addition to a section style,
44325 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
44328 \begin_layout Itemize
44329 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
44332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44336 \begin_layout Standard
44337 The entries made in the
44341 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
44344 \begin_inset space ~
44350 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
44355 button or alternatively press
44358 arg "paragraph-break"
44365 while the cursor is in the
44368 \begin_inset space ~
44376 \begin_layout Standard
44377 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
44379 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
44382 \begin_layout Itemize
44383 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
44384 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
44385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44392 with its typewriter version
44393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44407 \begin_layout Itemize
44408 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
44409 for example replacing occurrences of
44410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44414 \begin_inset Formula $R$
44418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44426 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
44430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44433 (you may want to enable the
44436 \begin_inset space ~
44444 \begin_inset space ~
44449 options and disable the
44458 in order to avoid replacing all
44459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44466 letters occurring in normal text),
44468 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
44472 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
44477 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
44481 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
44487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44491 \begin_layout Standard
44492 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
44496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44497 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
44499 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44501 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
44511 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
44516 This is done with the context menu
44518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44519 Insert Regular Expression
44521 while the cursor is in the
44526 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
44530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44531 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
44534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44541 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
44543 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
44549 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
44550 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
44551 Examples of using such a feature may be:
44554 \begin_layout Enumerate
44555 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
44561 editor the fraction
44562 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
44566 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44569 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
44572 \begin_layout Enumerate
44573 Searching for all text with a given style:
44576 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
44580 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
44583 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
44584 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
44590 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
44591 and the 'Select all'
44601 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44606 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
44607 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
44610 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44613 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
44614 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
44616 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
44617 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
44621 \begin_layout Description
44623 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
44624 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
44627 \begin_layout Description
44629 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
44631 \begin_inset space ~
44634 color colored text like cyan,
44639 \begin_layout Description
44641 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44651 \begin_layout Description
44653 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
44655 \begin_inset space ~
44662 \begin_layout Description
44664 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
44666 \begin_inset space ~
44675 \begin_layout Description
44677 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
44679 \begin_inset space ~
44688 \begin_layout Description
44690 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
44691 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
44696 \begin_layout Description
44698 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
44705 \begin_layout Description
44707 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
44708 Strike-through Single,
44712 \begin_layout Description
44714 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
44715 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
44718 \begin_layout Description
44720 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44735 \begin_layout Standard
44737 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
44738 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
44739 \begin_inset Formula $()$
44743 and referring back to them through
44744 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
44749 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
44755 try searching with the regexp
44756 \begin_inset Newline newline
44760 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
44772 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
44773 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
44778 \begin_inset Newline newline
44781 in order to find word repetitions,
44785 \begin_layout Standard
44786 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
44787 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
44793 \begin_layout Standard
44794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44803 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
44804 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
44805 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
44807 \begin_inset space ~
44811 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
44814 always refers to the first occurrence of
44815 \begin_inset Formula $()$
44818 in all entered regexps.
44826 \begin_layout Section
44828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44830 name "sec:Spellchecking"
44835 \begin_inset Index idx
44840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44849 \begin_layout Standard
44851 has a built-in spell checker.
44854 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44862 key or the toolbar button
44865 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44868 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
44869 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
44870 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
44871 Whenever an unknown word is found,
44872 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
44873 In the spellchecker sidebar,
44874 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
44875 if any could be found.
44876 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
44881 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
44882 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
44885 \begin_layout Standard
44887 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
44889 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44893 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
44895 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
44896 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
44899 \begin_inset space ~
44907 arg "dialog-show character"
44910 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
44912 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
44915 \begin_layout Standard
44916 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44917 can be downloaded from here:
44918 \begin_inset Newline newline
44922 \begin_inset Flex URL
44925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44927 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
44929 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
44930 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
44931 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
44939 \begin_inset Newline newline
44943 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
44945 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
44946 You should download
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44952 files for each language
44953 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
44958 link at the end of the opened webpage)
44961 To install a dictionary on Windows,
44963 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
44967 \begin_inset space ~
44970 files into \SpecialChar LyX
44971 's installation subfolder
44979 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
44981 \begin_inset Newline newline
44984 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
44985 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
44986 but in most cases these are
45006 is the language code.
45009 \begin_layout Subsection
45013 \begin_layout Standard
45016 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45017 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45022 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45025 you can set the following things:
45028 \begin_layout Description
45030 \begin_inset space ~
45033 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
45034 should use for spell checking.
45035 Depending on your platform,
45046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45047 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
45048 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45066 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
45069 \begin_layout Description
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45074 language If this field is not empty,
45076 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
45077 no matter what the document language is.
45080 \begin_layout Description
45082 \begin_inset space ~
45085 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
45087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45091 \begin_inset space \space{}
45095 This should normally not be needed.
45098 \begin_layout Description
45100 \begin_inset space ~
45104 \begin_inset space ~
45107 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
45108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45118 \begin_layout Description
45120 \begin_inset space ~
45123 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
45124 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
45125 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
45126 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
45127 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
45130 \begin_layout Description
45132 \begin_inset space ~
45136 \begin_inset space ~
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45143 comments If enabled,
45144 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
45147 \begin_layout Section
45149 \begin_inset Index idx
45154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45163 name "sec:Thesaurus"
45170 \begin_layout Standard
45172 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
45173 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
45174 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
45182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45185 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
45196 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
45200 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
45201 which are available for many languages.
45204 \begin_layout Standard
45205 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
45209 \begin_layout Subsection
45210 Setting up the thesaurus
45213 \begin_layout Standard
45222 thesauri consist of two files per language:
45223 A file with the suffix
45227 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
45232 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
45233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45237 \begin_inset space ~
45246 the US English files are named:
45249 \begin_layout Itemize
45253 \begin_layout Itemize
45257 \begin_layout Standard
45266 and its thesaurus installed,
45267 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
45270 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45271 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45272 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45274 \begin_inset space ~
45279 ) to the path where they are installed.
45283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45285 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
45286 typical locations are
45293 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
45298 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
45303 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
45307 dictionaries are to be found at
45313 LibreOffice-<Version>
45321 the default location is
45323 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
45324 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45325 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
45326 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
45327 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45328 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45337 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
45338 installation process,
45339 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
45342 \begin_layout Standard
45343 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
45345 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
45347 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
45350 thesaurus dictionaries,
45351 you can download them from here:
45352 \begin_inset Newline newline
45356 \begin_inset Flex URL
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45361 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
45363 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
45364 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
45365 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
45375 \begin_layout Standard
45376 To install a new dictionary,
45377 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
45379 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45380 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45381 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45388 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45390 If this path is not defined yet,
45391 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
45395 \begin_layout Standard
45397 you can also install new dictionaries via
45399 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45404 via your package manager (look for
45410 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
45414 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
45415 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
45417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45423 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45424 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45425 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45427 \begin_inset space ~
45432 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
45435 \begin_layout Subsection
45436 Using the thesaurus
45439 \begin_layout Standard
45440 To start the thesaurus,
45443 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45446 or the toolbar button
45449 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45452 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
45453 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
45454 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
45456 for some languages (such as English),
45457 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
45458 but also generic terms (such as
45467 related terms (such as
45470 \begin_inset space ~
45483 \begin_inset space ~
45493 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
45503 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
45506 \begin_layout Standard
45507 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
45508 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
45509 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
45512 \begin_layout Standard
45513 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
45519 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
45521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45525 \begin_inset space \space{}
45528 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
45529 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
45530 infinitive for verbs).
45532 looking up the word form
45537 while results are shown for the word form
45542 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
45543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45547 \begin_inset space \space{}
45559 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
45560 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
45561 thus the ending remains).
45564 \begin_layout Section
45566 \begin_inset Index idx
45571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45578 \begin_inset Index idx
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45585 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45602 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
45609 \begin_layout Standard
45610 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
45611 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
45612 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
45614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45616 \begin_inset space ~
45619 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45621 \begin_inset space ~
45629 \begin_layout Standard
45630 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
45645 The color depends on the author that made the change.
45646 You can change the color in
45648 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45649 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45651 \begin_inset space ~
45655 \begin_inset space ~
45660 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45666 \begin_inset Index idx
45671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45673 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45687 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
45688 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
45689 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
45692 arg "changes-merge"
45698 \begin_layout Standard
45699 When change tracking is activated,
45700 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
45702 \begin_inset Index idx
45707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45709 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45726 \begin_layout Standard
45727 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45733 \begin_layout Standard
45734 \begin_inset Graphics
45735 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
45743 \begin_layout Standard
45744 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45750 \begin_layout Standard
45751 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
45754 \begin_layout Standard
45755 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45761 \begin_layout Standard
45762 \begin_inset Tabular
45763 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
45764 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45765 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45766 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45776 arg "changes-track"
45784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45792 \begin_inset space ~
45795 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45797 \begin_inset space ~
45806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45815 arg "changes-output"
45823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45831 \begin_inset space ~
45834 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45836 \begin_inset space ~
45840 \begin_inset space ~
45844 \begin_inset space ~
45853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45874 Jumps to the next change
45880 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 arg "change-accept"
45897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45903 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45905 \begin_inset space ~
45908 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45919 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 arg "change-reject"
45936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45942 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45944 \begin_inset space ~
45947 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45949 \begin_inset space ~
45958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45967 arg "changes-merge"
45975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45986 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45988 \begin_inset space ~
45997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46006 arg "all-changes-accept"
46014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46025 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46027 \begin_inset space ~
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 arg "all-changes-reject"
46057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46065 \begin_inset space ~
46068 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46070 \begin_inset space ~
46074 \begin_inset space ~
46083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46107 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46118 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46143 \begin_inset space ~
46159 \begin_layout Standard
46160 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46166 \begin_layout Standard
46167 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
46168 especially no format changes like from
46187 \begin_layout Standard
46188 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
46190 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
46191 When you merge changes,
46192 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
46193 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
46194 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
46195 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
46198 \begin_layout Standard
46199 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
46202 \begin_layout Standard
46204 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
46205 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46211 \begin_inset Index idx
46216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46219 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46234 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
46237 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46244 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46250 \begin_layout Section
46251 Comparison of Documents
46252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46254 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
46259 \begin_inset Index idx
46264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46265 Comparison of documents
46273 \begin_layout Standard
46274 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
46277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46281 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
46282 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
46283 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
46284 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
46287 \begin_inset space ~
46291 \begin_inset space ~
46295 \begin_inset space ~
46304 \begin_inset space ~
46308 \begin_inset space ~
46312 \begin_inset space ~
46316 \begin_inset space ~
46320 \begin_inset space ~
46324 \begin_inset space ~
46329 enables the change tracking option
46332 \begin_inset space ~
46336 \begin_inset space ~
46340 \begin_inset space ~
46345 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
46348 \begin_layout Section
46349 International Support
46350 \begin_inset Index idx
46355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46356 International support
46364 \begin_layout Standard
46365 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
46366 with any language you want.
46367 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46370 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46372 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
46380 \begin_layout Standard
46383 also supports phonetic symbols,
46385 \begin_inset space ~
46389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46391 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
46399 \begin_layout Subsection
46401 \begin_inset Index idx
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46408 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46423 \begin_inset Index idx
46428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46430 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46445 \begin_inset Index idx
46450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46452 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46469 \begin_layout Standard
46472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46473 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46476 dialog lets you set
46479 the quote style and character encoding
46484 \begin_layout Standard
46489 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46494 \begin_inset space ~
46499 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
46500 For details about the different encoding options see section
46501 \begin_inset space ~
46505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46507 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
46515 \begin_layout Subsection
46516 Keyboard mapping configuration
46517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46519 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
46526 \begin_layout Standard
46527 If you have for example a U.
46528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46531 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
46532 you can use an alternate keymap.
46534 if you want to write in Italian,
46535 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
46536 to use an Italian keymap.
46539 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46540 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46541 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
46544 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
46546 \begin_inset space ~
46550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46552 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46558 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
46561 \begin_layout Standard
46563 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
46567 normally write in Italian on a U.
46568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46571 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
46573 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
46574 This and many other customizations are explained in the
46581 \begin_layout Chapter
46584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46586 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
46593 \begin_layout Standard
46594 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
46595 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
46598 \begin_layout Section
46600 \begin_inset Index idx
46605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46607 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46624 \begin_layout Standard
46629 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
46632 \begin_layout Subsection
46636 \begin_layout Standard
46637 Creates a new document.
46640 \begin_layout Subsection
46644 \begin_layout Standard
46645 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
46646 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
46647 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
46649 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
46651 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
46656 \begin_layout Subsection
46660 \begin_layout Standard
46664 \begin_layout Subsection
46668 \begin_layout Standard
46669 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
46670 Click there on a file to open it.
46673 \begin_layout Subsection
46675 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
46679 \begin_layout Standard
46681 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
46682 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
46686 \begin_layout Subsection
46690 \begin_layout Standard
46691 Closes the current document.
46694 \begin_layout Subsection
46698 \begin_layout Standard
46699 Closes all opened documents.
46702 \begin_layout Subsection
46706 \begin_layout Standard
46707 Saves the actual document.
46710 \begin_layout Subsection
46714 \begin_layout Standard
46715 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
46716 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
46720 \begin_layout Subsection
46722 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
46726 \begin_layout Standard
46728 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
46729 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
46734 \begin_layout Subsection
46738 \begin_layout Standard
46739 Saves all opened documents.
46742 \begin_layout Subsection
46746 \begin_layout Standard
46747 Reloads the actual document from disk.
46750 \begin_layout Subsection
46754 \begin_layout Standard
46755 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
46756 It is described in the section
46758 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
46763 Additional Features
46768 \begin_layout Subsection
46772 \begin_layout Standard
46773 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
46779 plain text files and comma separated,
46780 table-like text files (CSV).
46781 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
46785 \begin_layout Standard
46786 When using the menu entry
46789 \begin_inset space ~
46795 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
46796 when using the menu entry
46799 \begin_inset space ~
46803 \begin_inset space ~
46807 \begin_inset space ~
46813 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
46814 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
46817 \begin_layout Subsection
46819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46821 name "subsec:Export"
46828 \begin_layout Standard
46829 You can export your document to various file formats.
46830 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46832 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
46833 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
46834 during its configuration.
46837 \begin_layout Standard
46838 Here is a list of all available entries;
46839 some of them are explained in detail in section
46840 \begin_inset space ~
46844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46846 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46854 \begin_layout Description
46860 \begin_inset space ~
46863 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46868 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
46869 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
46870 \begin_inset Newline newline
46873 Since \SpecialChar LyX
46874 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
46878 \begin_layout Description
46879 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
46884 \begin_layout Description
46886 \begin_inset space ~
46889 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
46894 \begin_layout Description
46895 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
46896 's native DVI-format.
46897 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
46899 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
46906 \begin_layout Description
46907 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
46910 \begin_layout Description
46912 \begin_inset space ~
46919 ) DVI-format using the program
46921 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46925 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
46930 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46939 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
46947 \begin_layout Description
46949 \begin_inset space ~
46952 (cropped) the same as
46956 but with cropped page margins.
46959 \begin_layout Description
46961 \begin_inset space ~
46964 Dot text file with code in the programming language
46968 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
46973 \begin_layout Description
46978 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46987 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
46995 \begin_layout Description
46997 \begin_inset space ~
47001 \begin_inset space ~
47004 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
47009 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
47016 \begin_layout Description
47020 \begin_inset space ~
47029 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47030 source that is compilable with the program
47032 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47036 \begin_layout Description
47040 \begin_inset space ~
47045 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47047 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
47057 \begin_layout Description
47061 \begin_inset space ~
47066 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47068 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
47069 only this format is readable by the
47076 \begin_layout Description
47080 \begin_inset space ~
47089 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47090 source that is compilable with the program
47096 \begin_layout Description
47098 \begin_inset space ~
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47109 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47110 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
47115 \begin_layout Description
47117 \begin_inset space ~
47120 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
47121 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
47123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47127 \begin_inset space \space{}
47132 \begin_inset space ~
47137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47152 represent the version number)
47155 \begin_layout Description
47157 \begin_inset space ~
47161 \begin_inset space ~
47164 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
47166 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47171 \begin_layout Description
47172 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
47173 's internal XHTML engine
47176 \begin_layout Description
47178 \begin_inset space ~
47182 \begin_inset space ~
47186 \begin_inset space ~
47190 \begin_inset space ~
47193 XML Office Open XML file,
47199 For the conversion the program
47208 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47211 \begin_layout Description
47212 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
47217 \begin_layout Description
47219 \begin_inset space ~
47222 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
47232 For the conversion the program
47241 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47244 \begin_layout Description
47246 \begin_inset space ~
47249 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
47250 For the conversion the program
47259 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47262 \begin_layout Description
47264 \begin_inset space ~
47267 (cropped) the same as
47270 \begin_inset space ~
47275 but with cropped page margins
47278 \begin_layout Description
47282 \begin_inset space ~
47287 PDF-format using the program
47292 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47295 \begin_layout Description
47299 \begin_inset space ~
47303 \begin_inset space ~
47311 \begin_inset space ~
47316 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
47317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47321 \begin_inset space \space{}
47324 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
47327 \begin_layout Description
47331 \begin_inset space ~
47336 PDF-format using the program
47338 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47342 produces PDF-files directly
47345 \begin_layout Description
47349 \begin_inset space ~
47354 PDF-format using the program
47359 produces PDF-files directly
47362 \begin_layout Description
47366 \begin_inset space ~
47371 PDF-format using the program
47376 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47379 \begin_layout Description
47383 \begin_inset space ~
47388 PDF-format using the program
47394 produces PDF-files directly
47397 \begin_layout Description
47401 \begin_inset space ~
47409 \begin_layout Description
47413 \begin_inset space ~
47417 \begin_inset space ~
47423 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
47428 \begin_layout Description
47433 PostScript format using the program
47442 options see section
47443 \begin_inset space ~
47447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47449 reference "subsec:General-output"
47457 \begin_layout Description
47458 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47459 source and also code in the statistical programming language
47472 it is possible to use
47476 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47480 \begin_layout Standard
47481 If one of the menu entries
47489 \begin_inset space ~
47499 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47501 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
47504 \begin_inset space ~
47508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47510 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47516 \begin_inset Index idx
47521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47522 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47531 \begin_layout Subsection
47535 \begin_layout Standard
47536 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47545 reference "sec:Paths"
47551 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
47560 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
47561 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
47562 's preferences as described in section
47563 \begin_inset space ~
47567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47569 reference "subsec:Converters"
47577 \begin_layout Subsection
47578 New and Close Window
47581 \begin_layout Standard
47582 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47586 \begin_layout Subsection
47590 \begin_layout Standard
47591 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
47594 \begin_layout Section
47596 \begin_inset Index idx
47601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47603 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47620 \begin_layout Subsection
47624 \begin_layout Standard
47625 Described in section
47626 \begin_inset space ~
47630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47632 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
47640 \begin_layout Subsection
47648 \begin_layout Standard
47649 Described in section
47650 \begin_inset space ~
47654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47656 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
47664 \begin_layout Subsection
47668 \begin_layout Standard
47669 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
47670 If the cursor is outside an inset,
47671 the whole document will be selected.
47674 \begin_layout Subsection
47678 \begin_layout Standard
47679 Selects the whole document.
47682 \begin_layout Subsection
47683 Find & Replace (Quick)
47686 \begin_layout Standard
47687 Described in section
47688 \begin_inset space ~
47692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47694 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
47702 \begin_layout Subsection
47703 Find & Replace (Advanced)
47706 \begin_layout Standard
47707 Described in section
47708 \begin_inset space ~
47712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47714 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
47722 \begin_layout Subsection
47723 Move Paragraph Up/Down
47726 \begin_layout Standard
47727 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
47730 \begin_layout Subsection
47732 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
47736 \begin_layout Standard
47738 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
47739 Described in section
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47746 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
47756 \begin_layout Subsection
47758 \begin_inset Index idx
47763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47765 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47782 \begin_layout Standard
47783 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
47784 line spacing and label width.
47785 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
47788 \begin_layout Standard
47789 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
47795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47796 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47798 \begin_inset space ~
47804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
47808 \begin_layout Subsection
47810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
47814 \begin_layout Standard
47816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
47817 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
47821 \begin_layout Enumerate
47823 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
47824 Customize text properties by means of the
47830 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
47834 this is described in section
47835 \begin_inset space ~
47839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47841 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
47849 \begin_layout Enumerate
47851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
47852 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
47854 Apply last settings
47857 \begin_layout Enumerate
47859 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
47860 Change the casing of selected text (
47877 \begin_layout Subsection
47879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
47883 \begin_layout Standard
47885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
47886 This sub-menu only appears
47887 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
47889 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
47890 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
47916 \begin_inset space ~
47920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47922 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
47932 \begin_layout Subsection
47933 Table and Rows & Columns
47936 \begin_layout Standard
47937 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
47938 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
47939 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
47942 \begin_layout Subsection
47946 \begin_layout Standard
47947 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
47948 It will dissolve this inset.
47949 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
47952 \begin_layout Subsection
47956 \begin_layout Standard
47957 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
47958 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
47961 \begin_layout Subsection
47962 Increase/Decrease List Depth
47965 \begin_layout Standard
47966 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
47967 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
47968 \begin_inset space ~
47972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47974 reference "sec:Nesting"
47980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47982 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47990 \begin_layout Section
47992 \begin_inset Index idx
47997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47999 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48016 \begin_layout Standard
48017 At the bottom of the
48021 menu the opened documents are listed.
48024 \begin_layout Subsection
48025 Open/Close all Insets
48028 \begin_layout Standard
48029 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
48032 \begin_layout Subsection
48033 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
48036 \begin_layout Standard
48037 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
48040 \begin_layout Standard
48041 Math macros are described in the
48048 \begin_layout Subsection
48052 \begin_layout Standard
48053 Shows the outline window as described in sections
48054 \begin_inset space ~
48058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48060 reference "sec:Navigating"
48066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48068 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
48076 \begin_layout Subsection
48080 \begin_layout Standard
48081 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
48082 as described in section
48083 \begin_inset space ~
48087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48089 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48097 \begin_layout Subsection
48101 \begin_layout Standard
48102 Opens a window showing console messages.
48103 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
48105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48109 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
48110 is processing the document.
48113 \begin_layout Subsection
48115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48117 name "subsec:Toolbars"
48122 \begin_inset Index idx
48127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48136 \begin_layout Standard
48137 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
48138 All toolbars and the
48141 \begin_inset space ~
48159 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
48161 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
48163 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
48167 \begin_layout Standard
48169 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
48173 \begin_inset space ~
48194 \begin_inset space ~
48207 \begin_inset space ~
48212 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
48215 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
48220 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
48222 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
48237 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
48238 denoted in the menu with the suffix
48247 \begin_layout Standard
48252 state the toolbar is permanently shown
48253 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
48259 state it is never shown
48266 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
48267 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
48268 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
48269 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
48271 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
48276 \begin_layout Standard
48278 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
48279 \begin_inset space ~
48283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48285 reference "sec:Toolbars"
48293 \begin_layout Subsection
48297 \begin_layout Standard
48301 \begin_inset space ~
48305 \begin_inset space ~
48309 \begin_inset space ~
48313 \begin_inset space ~
48317 \begin_inset space ~
48321 \begin_inset space ~
48326 will split \SpecialChar LyX
48327 's main window vertically while
48330 \begin_inset space ~
48334 \begin_inset space ~
48338 \begin_inset space ~
48342 \begin_inset space ~
48346 \begin_inset space ~
48350 \begin_inset space ~
48355 will split it horizontally.
48356 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
48357 or to view the same document,
48358 but at different positions.
48359 You can even split the main window several times to view,
48361 three or more documents at the same time.
48362 To close a split view,
48366 \begin_inset space ~
48370 \begin_inset space ~
48378 \begin_layout Subsection
48382 \begin_layout Standard
48383 Closes a split view.
48386 \begin_layout Subsection
48390 \begin_layout Standard
48391 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
48392 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
48393 's main window fullscreen.
48394 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
48396 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
48399 \begin_layout Section
48401 \begin_inset Index idx
48406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48408 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48425 \begin_layout Subsection
48429 \begin_layout Standard
48430 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
48431 \begin_inset space ~
48435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48437 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
48449 \begin_layout Subsection
48451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48453 name "subsec:Special-Character"
48460 \begin_layout Standard
48461 Here you can insert the following characters:
48464 \begin_layout Description
48469 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48471 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
48472 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48473 -packages you have installed.
48474 You can get a complete display by checking
48477 \begin_inset space ~
48483 \begin_inset Newline newline
48487 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48496 Not all characters will be visible in the
48500 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
48501 \begin_inset space ~
48505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48507 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48512 ) can display every character.
48520 \begin_layout Description
48521 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
48526 \begin_layout Description
48528 \begin_inset space ~
48532 \begin_inset space ~
48535 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
48536 \begin_inset space ~
48540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48542 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
48550 \begin_layout Description
48552 \begin_inset space ~
48555 Quote Inserts this quote:
48557 no matter what quote style you selected in the
48559 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48560 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48566 \begin_layout Description
48568 \begin_inset space ~
48571 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
48573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48574 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48580 \begin_layout Description
48582 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
48584 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
48588 \begin_inset space ~
48591 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
48592 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
48594 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
48598 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
48602 \begin_layout Description
48604 \begin_inset space ~
48607 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
48608 \SpecialChar breakableslash
48612 \begin_layout Description
48614 \begin_inset space ~
48618 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
48619 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
48625 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48630 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
48632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48636 \begin_inset space \space{}
48639 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
48640 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
48647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48650 To insert a fraction use the command
48655 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48659 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
48665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48668 The visible space is hereby the character before the
48675 \begin_layout Description
48677 \begin_inset space ~
48680 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
48681 \SpecialChar menuseparator
48685 \begin_layout Description
48687 \begin_inset space ~
48691 \begin_inset Index idx
48696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48703 \begin_inset Index idx
48708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48710 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48724 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
48725 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48731 \begin_inset Index idx
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48739 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48754 \begin_inset Newline newline
48757 More information about this feature can be found in the
48763 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48769 \begin_layout Description
48770 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
48775 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
48779 \begin_layout Subsection
48783 \begin_layout Standard
48784 Opens a submenu with the following options:
48787 \begin_layout Description
48788 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
48790 \begin_inset script superscript
48792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48802 \begin_layout Description
48803 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
48805 \begin_inset script subscript
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48816 \begin_layout Description
48818 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
48820 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
48824 \begin_inset space ~
48828 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
48830 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
48833 space as described in section
48834 \begin_inset space ~
48838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48840 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
48848 \begin_layout Description
48850 \begin_inset space ~
48853 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
48854 \begin_inset space ~
48858 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
48860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48862 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
48868 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
48870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48872 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
48882 \begin_layout Description
48884 \begin_inset space ~
48887 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
48888 \begin_inset space ~
48892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48894 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
48902 \begin_layout Description
48904 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
48906 \begin_inset space ~
48909 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
48911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48915 \begin_inset space \space{}
48918 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
48919 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
48926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48929 To insert a fraction use the command
48934 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48938 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
48944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48947 The visible space is hereby the character before the
48956 \begin_layout Description
48958 \begin_inset space ~
48961 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
48962 \begin_inset space ~
48966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48968 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
48976 \begin_layout Description
48978 \begin_inset space ~
48981 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
48982 \begin_inset space ~
48986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48988 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
48996 \begin_layout Description
48998 \begin_inset space ~
49001 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
49002 \begin_inset space ~
49006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49008 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
49016 \begin_layout Description
49017 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
49018 \begin_inset space ~
49022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49024 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
49032 \begin_layout Description
49034 \begin_inset space ~
49037 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
49038 \begin_inset space ~
49042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49044 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
49052 \begin_layout Description
49054 \begin_inset space ~
49057 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
49058 \begin_inset space ~
49062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49064 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
49072 \begin_layout Description
49074 \begin_inset space ~
49078 \begin_inset space ~
49081 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
49083 \begin_inset space ~
49087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49089 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
49097 for a usage example.
49100 \begin_layout Description
49102 \begin_inset space ~
49106 \begin_inset space ~
49109 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
49110 \begin_inset space ~
49114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49116 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49124 \begin_layout Description
49126 \begin_inset space ~
49129 Break Inserts a forced line break that
49130 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
49133 justifies the remaining text as described in section
49134 \begin_inset space ~
49138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49140 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49148 \begin_layout Description
49150 \begin_inset space ~
49153 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
49154 \begin_inset space ~
49158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49160 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49168 \begin_layout Description
49170 \begin_inset space ~
49173 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
49174 as described in section
49175 \begin_inset space ~
49179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49181 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49187 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
49191 \begin_layout Description
49193 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49195 \begin_inset space ~
49199 \begin_inset space ~
49202 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
49203 to prevent a page break at the given position.
49205 \begin_inset space ~
49209 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
49211 \begin_inset space ~
49215 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49219 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
49229 \begin_layout Description
49231 \begin_inset space ~
49234 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
49235 \begin_inset space ~
49239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49241 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49249 \begin_layout Description
49251 \begin_inset space ~
49255 \begin_inset space ~
49258 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
49259 \begin_inset space ~
49263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49265 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49273 \begin_layout Subsection
49275 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49279 \begin_layout Standard
49281 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49282 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
49283 The submenu allows you to insert
49286 \begin_layout Description
49288 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49290 \begin_inset space ~
49293 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
49296 \begin_layout Description
49298 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49300 \begin_inset space ~
49304 \begin_inset space ~
49307 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
49310 \begin_layout Description
49312 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49314 \begin_inset space ~
49317 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
49320 \begin_layout Description
49322 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49324 \begin_inset space ~
49327 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
49330 \begin_layout Description
49332 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49334 \begin_inset space ~
49338 \begin_inset space ~
49341 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
49344 \begin_layout Description
49346 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49348 \begin_inset space ~
49351 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
49354 \begin_layout Description
49356 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
49358 \begin_inset space ~
49362 \begin_inset space ~
49366 \begin_inset space ~
49369 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
49372 \begin_layout Description
49374 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
49376 \begin_inset space ~
49380 \begin_inset space ~
49383 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
49385 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
49388 \begin_layout Description
49390 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49392 \begin_inset space ~
49395 Name inserts the user name as specified in
49397 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49398 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49404 \begin_layout Description
49406 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49408 \begin_inset space ~
49411 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
49413 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49414 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49420 \begin_layout Description
49422 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49423 Other\SpecialChar ldots
49424 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
49427 \begin_layout Subsection
49430 List/Contents/References
49433 \begin_layout Standard
49434 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
49438 \begin_inset space ~
49462 are described in section
49463 \begin_inset space ~
49467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49469 reference "sec:toc"
49479 is described in section
49480 \begin_inset space ~
49484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49486 reference "sec:Index"
49496 is described in section
49497 \begin_inset space ~
49501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49503 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
49510 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49513 is described in section
49514 \begin_inset space ~
49518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49520 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49528 \begin_layout Subsection
49532 \begin_layout Standard
49534 as described in section
49535 \begin_inset space ~
49539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49541 reference "sec:Floats"
49546 and in detail the chapter
49553 \begin_inset space ~
49561 \begin_layout Subsection
49565 \begin_layout Standard
49567 described in section
49568 \begin_inset space ~
49572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49574 reference "sec:Notes"
49582 \begin_layout Subsection
49586 \begin_layout Standard
49587 Inserts a branch inset,
49589 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
49590 Branches are described in section
49591 \begin_inset space ~
49595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49597 reference "sec:Branches"
49605 \begin_layout Subsection
49609 \begin_layout Standard
49610 Inserts document class-specific insets.
49611 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
49612 An example is the document class
49613 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
49615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49623 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
49627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49632 with three custom insets.
49635 Flex insets and InsetLayout
49639 Installing New Document Classes,
49640 The Layout file format
49646 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
49649 \begin_layout Subsection
49651 \begin_inset Index idx
49656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49665 \begin_layout Standard
49666 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
49667 For more information see chapter
49669 External Document Parts
49672 \begin_inset space ~
49678 \begin_layout Subsection
49680 \begin_inset Index idx
49685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49694 \begin_layout Standard
49695 Inserts a box in a certain style.
49696 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
49703 \begin_inset space ~
49711 \begin_layout Subsection
49715 \begin_layout Standard
49720 dialog as described in section
49721 \begin_inset space ~
49725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49727 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49735 \begin_layout Subsection
49739 \begin_layout Standard
49744 as described in section
49745 \begin_inset space ~
49749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49751 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49759 \begin_layout Subsection
49763 \begin_layout Standard
49768 as described in section
49769 \begin_inset space ~
49773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49775 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49783 \begin_layout Subsection
49785 \begin_inset Index idx
49790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49797 \begin_inset Index idx
49802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49804 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49814 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49831 \begin_layout Standard
49832 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
49833 Floats are described in section
49834 \begin_inset space ~
49838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49840 reference "sec:Floats"
49846 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
49849 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
49857 \begin_inset space ~
49865 \begin_layout Subsection
49869 \begin_layout Standard
49870 Inserts an index entry as described in section
49871 \begin_inset space ~
49875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49877 reference "sec:Index"
49885 \begin_layout Subsection
49889 \begin_layout Standard
49890 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
49891 \begin_inset space ~
49895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49897 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
49905 \begin_layout Subsection
49909 \begin_layout Standard
49910 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
49911 Tables are described in section
49912 \begin_inset space ~
49916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49918 reference "sec:Tables"
49923 and in detail in the chapter
49930 \begin_inset space ~
49938 \begin_layout Subsection
49942 \begin_layout Standard
49948 Graphics are described in section
49949 \begin_inset space ~
49953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49955 reference "sec:Graphics"
49963 \begin_layout Subsection
49967 \begin_layout Standard
49968 Inserts a URL as described in section
49969 \begin_inset space ~
49973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49975 reference "subsec:URLs"
49983 \begin_layout Subsection
49987 \begin_layout Standard
49988 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
49989 \begin_inset space ~
49993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49995 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
50003 \begin_layout Subsection
50007 \begin_layout Standard
50008 Inserts a footnote as described in section
50009 \begin_inset space ~
50013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50015 reference "sec:Footnotes"
50023 \begin_layout Subsection
50027 \begin_layout Standard
50028 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
50029 \begin_inset space ~
50033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50035 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
50043 \begin_layout Subsection
50046 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
50049 \begin_layout Standard
50050 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
50052 \begin_inset space ~
50056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50058 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
50063 for an explanation.
50066 \begin_layout Subsection
50070 \begin_layout Standard
50071 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
50072 in or behind a section heading,
50073 title or caption of a float.
50074 Inserts a short title as described in section
50075 \begin_inset space ~
50079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50081 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
50089 \begin_layout Subsection
50094 \begin_layout Standard
50095 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
50096 Code box as described in section
50097 \begin_inset space ~
50101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50103 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
50111 \begin_layout Subsection
50113 \begin_inset Index idx
50118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50127 \begin_layout Standard
50128 Inserts a program listings box.
50129 Program listings are explained in the chapter
50131 Program Code Listings
50136 \begin_inset space ~
50144 \begin_layout Subsection
50146 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50150 \begin_layout Standard
50152 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50153 Inserts the actual date.
50154 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
50160 \begin_layout Subsection
50164 \begin_layout Standard
50165 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
50166 \begin_inset space ~
50170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50172 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50180 \begin_layout Section
50182 \begin_inset Index idx
50187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50189 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50206 \begin_layout Standard
50207 This menu lists the existing chapters,
50212 \begin_inset space ~
50215 of the current document.
50216 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
50219 \begin_layout Subsection
50223 \begin_layout Standard
50224 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
50225 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
50228 \begin_inset space ~
50232 To create bookmarks for this example,
50234 \begin_inset space ~
50237 2.5 and use the submenu
50240 \begin_inset space ~
50244 \begin_inset space ~
50251 \begin_inset space ~
50257 \begin_inset space ~
50261 \begin_inset space ~
50267 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
50270 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
50276 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
50279 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
50282 \begin_layout Standard
50284 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
50285 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
50291 \begin_inset space ~
50296 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
50299 \begin_inset space ~
50304 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
50307 \begin_layout Subsection
50313 \begin_layout Standard
50314 Jump to the next note,
50316 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
50319 \begin_layout Subsection
50323 \begin_layout Standard
50324 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
50325 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
50326 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
50329 \begin_inset space ~
50333 \begin_inset space ~
50341 \begin_layout Subsection
50345 \begin_layout Standard
50346 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
50349 The \SpecialChar LyX
50350 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
50352 \begin_inset space ~
50360 \begin_inset space ~
50365 manual for a detailed description.
50368 \begin_layout Section
50370 \begin_inset Index idx
50375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50377 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50394 \begin_layout Subsection
50398 \begin_layout Standard
50399 Change Tracking is described in section
50400 \begin_inset space ~
50404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50406 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50414 \begin_layout Subsection
50422 \begin_layout Standard
50423 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
50424 by viewing or exporting a document,
50425 this menu will be enabled.
50426 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50428 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
50430 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
50431 \begin_inset Newline newline
50434 With the help of the logfile,
50435 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50439 \begin_layout Standard
50442 Open Containing Directory
50444 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
50445 's temporary folder for the document.
50446 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
50447 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
50448 For example some journals require to send the
50452 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50456 \begin_layout Subsection
50457 Start Appendix Here
50460 \begin_layout Standard
50461 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
50462 \begin_inset space ~
50466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50468 reference "sec:Appendices"
50476 \begin_layout Subsection
50478 \begin_inset space ~
50484 \begin_layout Standard
50485 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
50487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50489 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50491 \begin_inset space ~
50495 \begin_inset space ~
50502 \begin_inset space ~
50506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50508 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50513 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
50516 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50517 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50519 \begin_inset space ~
50522 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50524 \begin_inset space ~
50527 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50529 \begin_inset space ~
50533 \begin_inset space ~
50540 \begin_inset space ~
50544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50546 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50551 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
50552 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
50554 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50555 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50557 \begin_inset space ~
50560 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50562 \begin_inset space ~
50565 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50570 \begin_inset space ~
50574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50576 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50582 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
50583 when it is first configured.
50584 The default output format is
50587 \begin_inset space ~
50595 \begin_layout Subsection
50596 View (Other Formats)
50599 \begin_layout Standard
50600 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
50601 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
50602 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
50603 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50604 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
50606 All possible formats are listed in section
50607 \begin_inset space ~
50611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50613 reference "subsec:Export"
50619 You should at least see the menu entry
50625 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
50627 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
50629 \begin_inset space ~
50633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50635 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
50641 \begin_inset Index idx
50646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50647 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
50656 \begin_layout Standard
50657 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
50658 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
50660 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50661 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50663 \begin_inset space ~
50666 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50668 \begin_inset space ~
50671 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50676 \begin_inset space ~
50680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50682 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50688 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
50689 when it is first configured.
50692 \begin_layout Subsection
50694 \begin_inset space ~
50700 \begin_layout Standard
50701 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
50704 \begin_layout Subsection
50705 Update (Other Formats)
50708 \begin_layout Standard
50709 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
50712 \begin_layout Subsection
50713 View Master Document
50716 \begin_layout Standard
50717 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
50719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50733 \begin_inset space ~
50738 manual for more information on this topic).
50739 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
50741 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
50745 \begin_inset space ~
50749 \begin_inset space ~
50754 generates the output of the whole book,
50759 will just output the chapter alone.
50762 \begin_layout Standard
50763 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
50765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50766 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50767 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50769 \begin_inset space ~
50773 \begin_inset space ~
50780 \begin_inset space ~
50784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50786 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50791 ) or in the preferences (menu
50793 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50794 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50796 \begin_inset space ~
50799 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50801 \begin_inset space ~
50804 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50806 \begin_inset space ~
50810 \begin_inset space ~
50817 \begin_inset space ~
50821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50823 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50831 \begin_layout Subsection
50832 Update Master Document
50835 \begin_layout Standard
50836 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
50838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50852 \begin_inset space ~
50857 manual for more information on this topic).
50858 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
50861 \begin_layout Standard
50862 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
50864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50865 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50866 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50868 \begin_inset space ~
50872 \begin_inset space ~
50879 \begin_inset space ~
50883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50885 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50890 ) or in the preferences (menu
50892 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50893 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50895 \begin_inset space ~
50898 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50900 \begin_inset space ~
50903 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50905 \begin_inset space ~
50909 \begin_inset space ~
50916 \begin_inset space ~
50920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50922 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50930 \begin_layout Subsection
50932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50934 name "subsec:Compressed"
50941 \begin_layout Standard
50942 Un/compresses the current document.
50943 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
50945 Additional Features
50947 manual for details).
50950 \begin_layout Subsection
50954 \begin_layout Standard
50955 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
50958 \begin_layout Subsection
50962 \begin_layout Standard
50963 The document settings are described in appendix
50964 \begin_inset space ~
50968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50970 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
50978 \begin_layout Section
50980 \begin_inset Index idx
50985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50987 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51004 \begin_layout Subsection
51008 \begin_layout Standard
51009 Spell checking is explained in section
51010 \begin_inset space ~
51014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51016 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51024 \begin_layout Subsection
51028 \begin_layout Standard
51029 The thesaurus is described in section
51030 \begin_inset space ~
51034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51036 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
51044 \begin_layout Subsection
51046 \begin_inset Index idx
51051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51058 \begin_inset Index idx
51063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51072 \begin_layout Standard
51073 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
51076 \begin_layout Subsection
51082 \begin_inset Index idx
51087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51088 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51097 \begin_layout Standard
51098 Generates with the help of the program
51100 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51103 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
51104 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
51105 This feature is not available on Windows.
51108 \begin_layout Subsection
51114 \begin_inset Index idx
51119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51129 \begin_layout Standard
51130 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51135 \begin_inset space ~
51140 to see the full filename paths.
51143 \begin_layout Subsection
51145 \begin_inset Index idx
51150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51159 \begin_layout Standard
51160 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
51161 files as described in section
51162 \begin_inset space ~
51166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51168 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
51176 \begin_layout Subsection
51178 \begin_inset Index idx
51183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51186 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51196 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
51199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51200 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51212 \begin_inset Index idx
51217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51218 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51227 \begin_layout Standard
51228 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
51232 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51233 -packages and programs it needs;
51235 \begin_inset space ~
51239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51241 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51249 \begin_layout Subsection
51253 \begin_layout Standard
51258 dialog as described in detail in appendix
51259 \begin_inset space ~
51263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51265 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
51273 \begin_layout Section
51275 \begin_inset Index idx
51280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51299 \begin_layout Standard
51300 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
51301 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
51303 If a file is not available in this language,
51304 the English version will be listed.
51307 \begin_layout Standard
51311 \begin_inset space ~
51316 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
51317 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51318 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
51320 \begin_inset space ~
51324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51326 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
51334 \begin_layout Standard
51338 \begin_inset space ~
51343 gives information about the copyright,
51344 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
51345 version you are using.
51348 \begin_layout Section
51350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51352 name "sec:Toolbars"
51359 \begin_layout Standard
51360 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
51361 \begin_inset space ~
51365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51367 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
51375 \begin_layout Standard
51376 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
51377 This is described in the
51379 Additional Features
51384 \begin_layout Subsection
51386 \begin_inset Index idx
51391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51393 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51410 \begin_layout Standard
51411 \begin_inset Graphics
51412 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
51420 \begin_layout Standard
51421 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51427 \begin_layout Standard
51428 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
51432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51444 \begin_inset Note Note
51447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51448 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
51453 manual for more information.
51461 \begin_layout Standard
51462 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51468 \begin_layout Standard
51469 \begin_inset Tabular
51470 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
51471 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51472 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51473 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51479 \begin_inset Graphics
51480 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
51490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51494 pull-down box for the environments
51507 \begin_layout Standard
51508 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
51514 \begin_layout Standard
51516 \begin_inset Tabular
51517 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
51518 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51519 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51520 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51544 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51574 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51604 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51620 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
51628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51634 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51650 arg "spelling-continuously"
51658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51662 Spellcheck continuously
51668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51691 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51721 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51751 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51781 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51811 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51813 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
51818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51836 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
51844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51850 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51876 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
51884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51890 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51918 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
51926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51932 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51933 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
51940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51963 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
51966 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51968 \begin_inset space ~
51971 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
51973 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
51979 arg "dialog-show character"
51990 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52011 Set text to noun style,
52013 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
52016 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52018 \begin_inset space ~
52021 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52023 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
52029 arg "dialog-show character"
52040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52046 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
52049 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
52057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52062 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
52065 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52078 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
52083 arg "textstyle-apply"
52093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52098 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
52099 Format text using the current settings in the
52101 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52103 \begin_inset space ~
52106 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52117 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52141 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
52143 \begin_inset space ~
52152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52161 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
52169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52189 arg "tabular-insert"
52197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52210 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52216 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
52219 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
52227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52232 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
52235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52251 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
52259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52263 Toggle outline window on/off,
52266 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
52273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52282 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
52290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52294 Toggle math toolbar on/off
52300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52309 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
52317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52321 Toggle table toolbar on/off
52334 \begin_layout Subsection
52336 \begin_inset Index idx
52341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52343 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52360 \begin_layout Standard
52361 \begin_inset Graphics
52362 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
52370 \begin_layout Standard
52371 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52377 \begin_layout Standard
52378 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52381 \begin_layout Standard
52382 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52388 \begin_layout Standard
52389 \begin_inset Tabular
52390 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
52391 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52392 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52393 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52430 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
52438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52457 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
52465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52475 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52484 arg "layout-toggle List"
52492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52511 arg "layout-toggle Description"
52519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52529 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52538 arg "depth-increment"
52546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52552 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52554 \begin_inset space ~
52558 \begin_inset space ~
52567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52576 arg "depth-decrement"
52584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52590 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52592 \begin_inset space ~
52596 \begin_inset space ~
52605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52614 arg "float-insert figure"
52622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52629 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
52636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52645 arg "float-insert table"
52653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52660 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
52667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52706 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
52714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52720 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52736 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
52744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52782 \begin_inset space ~
52791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52800 arg "nomencl-insert"
52808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52816 \begin_inset space ~
52825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52834 arg "footnote-insert"
52842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52864 arg "marginalnote-insert"
52872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52880 \begin_inset space ~
52889 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52912 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52913 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
52915 \begin_inset space ~
52924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52933 arg "box-insert Frameless"
52941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53009 \begin_inset space ~
53018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53027 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
53035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53042 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53058 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
53066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53073 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53075 \begin_inset space ~
53084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53093 arg "dialog-show character"
53101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53107 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53109 \begin_inset space ~
53112 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
53119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53125 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
53130 arg "textstyle-apply"
53138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53143 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
53144 Format text using the recent settings in the
53147 arg "dialog-show character"
53156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53165 arg "layout-paragraph"
53173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53179 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53181 \begin_inset space ~
53190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53199 arg "thesaurus-entry"
53207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53213 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
53227 \begin_layout Subsection
53228 View/Update Toolbar
53229 \begin_inset Index idx
53234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53236 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53253 \begin_layout Standard
53254 \begin_inset Graphics
53255 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
53262 \begin_layout Standard
53263 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53269 \begin_layout Standard
53270 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
53273 \begin_layout Standard
53274 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53280 \begin_layout Standard
53281 \begin_inset Tabular
53282 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
53283 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
53284 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53285 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53309 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53325 arg "buffer-update"
53333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53355 arg "master-buffer-view"
53363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53371 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
53373 \begin_inset space ~
53379 \begin_inset space ~
53388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53397 arg "master-buffer-update"
53405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53413 \begin_inset space ~
53417 \begin_inset space ~
53426 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53435 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
53443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53452 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
53454 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
53457 \SpecialChar menuseparator
53458 Synchronize with Output
53464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53475 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
53485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53492 View (Other Formats)
53498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53505 arg "update-others"
53509 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
53517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53524 Update (Other Formats)
53537 \begin_layout Standard
53539 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
53540 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
53545 \begin_layout Subsection
53549 \begin_layout Standard
53550 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
53551 \begin_inset space ~
53555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53557 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
53564 \begin_inset Index idx
53569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53571 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53588 \begin_inset space ~
53593 manual and the math macro toolbar
53594 \begin_inset Index idx
53599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53601 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53622 \begin_layout Chapter
53623 The Document Settings
53624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53626 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
53631 \begin_inset Index idx
53636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53638 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53655 \begin_layout Standard
53659 \begin_inset space ~
53664 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
53666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53670 You can save your document settings as default with the
53672 Save as Document Defaults
53674 button in any dialog.
53675 This will create a template named
53679 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
53680 when you create a new document without using a template.
53683 \begin_layout Standard
53688 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
53689 This affects mostly class options,
53690 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
53693 \begin_layout Standard
53694 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
53695 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
53696 To find a setting quicker,
53697 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
53699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53703 \begin_inset space \space{}
53707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53715 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
53716 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
53717 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
53720 \begin_layout Section
53724 \begin_layout Standard
53725 Here you set the document class,
53728 and a master document.
53729 Document classes are described in section
53730 \begin_inset space ~
53734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
53744 \begin_layout Standard
53748 \begin_inset space ~
53753 you can load you own layout-file,
53754 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
53759 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
53760 as a layout for a document class.
53761 For more about layout-files,
53764 Installing New Document Classes,
53765 Types of Layout Files
53774 \begin_layout Standard
53775 Some classes use special class options by default.
53776 If this is the case,
53777 they are listed in the field
53781 and you can decide to use them or not.
53782 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
53783 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
53788 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
53790 color and page layout packages.
53796 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53798 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
53802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53803 When you want to use one of the following drivers
53804 \begin_inset Newline newline
53818 \begin_inset Newline newline
53821 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
53828 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53830 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
53843 \begin_layout Standard
53848 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
53849 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
53850 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
53851 This way child documents are always compilable.
53852 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
53859 \begin_inset space ~
53867 \begin_layout Standard
53868 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53878 \begin_inset Index idx
53883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53886 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53901 \begin_inset Index idx
53906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53909 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53923 for cross-references,
53925 \begin_inset space ~
53929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53931 reference "sec:Cross-References"
53939 \begin_layout Section
53943 \begin_layout Standard
53944 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
53945 Please refer to the section
53948 \begin_inset space ~
53956 \begin_inset space ~
53961 manual for details.
53964 \begin_layout Section
53968 \begin_layout Standard
53969 Modules are explained in section
53970 \begin_inset space ~
53974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53976 reference "subsec:Modules"
53984 \begin_layout Section
53988 \begin_layout Standard
53990 \begin_inset space ~
53994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53996 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
54004 \begin_layout Section
54008 \begin_layout Standard
54009 The document font settings are described in section
54010 \begin_inset space ~
54014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54016 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
54024 \begin_layout Section
54028 \begin_layout Standard
54029 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
54041 \begin_inset space ~
54046 and whether it should be a
54049 \begin_inset space ~
54054 can also be specified here.
54057 \begin_layout Standard
54058 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
54059 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
54060 That would be impractical,
54062 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
54064 it will be as you specified in the output.
54067 \begin_layout Standard
54070 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
54073 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
54074 justifies the text on screen.
54075 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
54077 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
54081 \begin_layout Standard
54083 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
54092 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
54097 \begin_layout Section
54101 \begin_layout Standard
54102 This dialog is described in sections
54103 \begin_inset space ~
54107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54109 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
54115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54117 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
54125 \begin_layout Section
54129 \begin_layout Standard
54130 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
54131 \begin_inset space ~
54135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54137 reference "subsec:Margins"
54145 \begin_layout Section
54147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54149 name "sec:Language-encodings"
54154 \begin_inset Index idx
54159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54161 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54178 \begin_layout Standard
54179 The document language and quote styles are set here.
54180 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54181 (the \SpecialChar LyX
54182 file is always encoded in utf8).
54183 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
54184 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54185 -command is not known for a particular character).
54186 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
54190 \begin_layout Standard
54192 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
54195 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
54196 files in Unicode – or utf8,
54197 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
54198 's default encoding).
54199 This should normally fit your needs,
54200 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
54201 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
54202 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
54203 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
54205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54213 encodings is necessary.
54216 \begin_layout Standard
54218 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
54220 provides support for these traditional encodings.
54223 Traditional (auto-selected)
54231 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
54233 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54237 \begin_layout Standard
54239 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54240 If you use the option
54246 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
54249 If the document contains text in more than one language you
54250 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
54253 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54256 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
54257 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
54258 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
54263 \begin_layout Standard
54265 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
54274 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54276 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
54280 \begin_layout Standard
54282 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
54284 you can also select
54289 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
54290 Note that this encoding is then used for
54295 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
54298 \begin_layout Standard
54300 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54302 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
54306 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
54307 Do not load inputenc
54308 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54312 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
54314 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
54316 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54318 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
54319 in the next dropdown menu
54320 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54321 does what it states:
54323 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
54325 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
54327 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54328 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
54329 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54335 \begin_inset Index idx
54340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54342 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54347 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54352 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54366 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
54368 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54370 Note that this option is only available for the standard
54376 Traditional (auto-selected)
54383 \begin_layout Standard
54385 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
54387 also supports Unicode output,
54388 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
54390 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54391 installation supports Unicode),
54392 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
54393 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54394 is quite incomplete,
54395 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
54399 (when \SpecialChar LyX
54400 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54402 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54403 -commands is not used,
54404 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
54405 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54406 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54408 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54410 Both engines support Unicode natively.
54412 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
54415 \begin_inset space ~
54424 \begin_inset space ~
54432 \begin_inset space ~
54439 \begin_inset space ~
54443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54445 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
54451 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
54456 you might try out one of these new engines.
54461 \begin_layout Standard
54465 \begin_inset space ~
54470 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54471 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
54472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54480 The possible settings are:
54483 \begin_layout Description
54484 Default uses the language package that is selected in
54486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54487 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
54491 \begin_inset space ~
54495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54497 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
54505 \begin_layout Description
54506 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
54507 In many cases this will be
54512 \begin_inset Index idx
54517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54520 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54535 If the newer package
54540 \begin_inset Index idx
54545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54548 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54562 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54563 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54564 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
54566 this package will be used instead of
54573 \begin_layout Description
54575 \begin_inset space ~
54586 would be more appropriate.
54589 \begin_layout Description
54590 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
54591 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
54595 (for German texts),
54599 \begin_inset Newline newline
54604 usepackage{ngerman}
54607 \begin_layout Description
54608 None will not use a language package.
54609 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
54612 \begin_layout Standard
54613 Here is a list with the important encodings:
54616 \begin_layout Description
54618 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
54620 \begin_inset space ~
54624 \begin_inset space ~
54628 \begin_inset space ~
54636 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54642 \begin_inset Index idx
54647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54650 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54666 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54672 \begin_layout Description
54673 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
54674 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
54676 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
54678 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
54679 -commands are needed.
54681 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
54682 This is the same as the
54695 \begin_layout Description
54697 \begin_inset space ~
54701 \begin_inset space ~
54704 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
54707 \begin_layout Description
54709 \begin_inset space ~
54713 \begin_inset space ~
54716 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
54719 \begin_layout Description
54721 \begin_inset space ~
54724 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
54727 \begin_layout Description
54729 \begin_inset space ~
54733 \begin_inset space ~
54736 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
54737 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54738 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
54741 \begin_layout Description
54743 \begin_inset space ~
54747 \begin_inset space ~
54750 8859-13) for Estonian,
54751 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54752 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
54755 \begin_layout Description
54757 \begin_inset space ~
54761 \begin_inset space ~
54764 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
54765 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54766 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
54769 \begin_layout Description
54771 \begin_inset space ~
54775 \begin_inset space ~
54779 \begin_inset space ~
54782 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
54783 \begin_inset space ~
54789 \begin_layout Description
54791 \begin_inset space ~
54795 \begin_inset space ~
54799 \begin_inset space ~
54802 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
54809 Slovak and Slovenian
54812 \begin_layout Description
54814 \begin_inset space ~
54818 \begin_inset space ~
54821 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
54822 used especially on UNIX OSes,
54823 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
54824 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54825 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
54826 \begin_inset space ~
54830 \begin_inset space ~
54836 \begin_layout Description
54838 \begin_inset space ~
54842 \begin_inset space ~
54845 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
54846 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
54847 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
54848 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54849 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
54850 \begin_inset space ~
54854 \begin_inset space ~
54860 \begin_layout Description
54862 \begin_inset space ~
54866 \begin_inset space ~
54869 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
54872 \begin_layout Description
54874 \begin_inset space ~
54878 \begin_inset space ~
54881 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
54884 \begin_layout Description
54886 \begin_inset space ~
54890 \begin_inset space ~
54893 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
54896 Serbian and Ukrainian
54899 \begin_layout Description
54901 \begin_inset space ~
54904 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
54907 \begin_layout Description
54909 \begin_inset space ~
54912 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
54915 \begin_layout Description
54917 \begin_inset space ~
54921 \begin_inset space ~
54924 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
54927 \begin_layout Description
54929 \begin_inset space ~
54933 \begin_inset space ~
54939 \begin_layout Description
54941 \begin_inset space ~
54945 \begin_inset space ~
54948 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
54949 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
54952 \begin_layout Description
54954 \begin_inset space ~
54958 \begin_inset space ~
54964 \begin_layout Description
54966 \begin_inset space ~
54970 \begin_inset space ~
54973 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
54974 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54980 \begin_inset Index idx
54985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54988 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55004 set the document language to
55009 \begin_layout Description
55011 \begin_inset space ~
55015 \begin_inset space ~
55018 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55019 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55026 set the document language to
55029 \begin_inset space ~
55035 \begin_layout Description
55037 \begin_inset space ~
55041 \begin_inset space ~
55044 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55045 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55051 \begin_inset Index idx
55056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55059 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55075 set the document language to
55080 \begin_layout Description
55082 \begin_inset space ~
55086 \begin_inset space ~
55089 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55090 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55097 set the document language to
55102 \begin_layout Description
55104 \begin_inset space ~
55108 \begin_inset space ~
55111 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
55112 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55119 set the document language to
55124 \begin_layout Description
55126 \begin_inset space ~
55129 (EUC-KR) for Korean
55132 \begin_layout Description
55134 \begin_inset space ~
55138 \begin_inset space ~
55142 \begin_inset space ~
55145 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
55147 Maltese and Turkish
55150 \begin_layout Description
55152 \begin_inset space ~
55156 \begin_inset space ~
55160 \begin_inset space ~
55163 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
55172 Romanian and Slovenian,
55173 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
55176 \begin_layout Description
55178 \begin_inset space ~
55182 \begin_inset space ~
55188 \begin_layout Description
55190 \begin_inset space ~
55194 \begin_inset space ~
55197 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
55198 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
55201 \begin_layout Description
55203 \begin_inset space ~
55207 \begin_inset space ~
55210 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55216 \begin_inset Index idx
55221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55224 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55238 (for the languages Chinese,
55239 Japanese and Korean)
55240 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
55242 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55243 with the default encoding (
55245 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55251 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
55252 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55257 \begin_layout Description
55259 \begin_inset space ~
55267 \begin_inset space ~
55270 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
55277 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55281 which use Unicode directly,
55282 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55289 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55290 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55292 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55295 \begin_layout Description
55297 \begin_inset space ~
55301 \begin_inset space ~
55304 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55310 \begin_inset Index idx
55315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55318 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55333 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
55339 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
55341 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
55342 This used to be more comprehensive than
55345 \begin_inset space ~
55351 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
55356 \begin_layout Description
55358 \begin_inset space ~
55361 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55367 \begin_inset Index idx
55372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55375 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55391 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
55392 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
55393 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
55394 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55395 with the default encoding (
55397 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55403 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
55404 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55409 \begin_layout Description
55411 \begin_inset space ~
55415 \begin_inset space ~
55419 \begin_inset space ~
55422 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
55423 \begin_inset space ~
55429 \begin_layout Description
55431 \begin_inset space ~
55435 \begin_inset space ~
55439 \begin_inset space ~
55442 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
55457 Spanish and Swedish;
55458 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
55461 \begin_layout Description
55463 \begin_inset space ~
55467 \begin_inset space ~
55471 \begin_inset space ~
55474 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
55475 but with the Euro currency sign,
55476 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
55479 \begin_layout Section
55481 \begin_inset Index idx
55486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55488 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55503 \begin_inset Index idx
55508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55510 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55525 \begin_inset Index idx
55530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55532 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55547 \begin_inset Index idx
55552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55554 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55571 \begin_layout Standard
55572 Here you can alter the font color for the
55581 \begin_inset space ~
55587 light grey)for the background color for the
55595 \begin_inset space ~
55606 sets the color back to the default.
55609 \begin_layout Standard
55610 Clicking any button showing
55618 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
55619 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
55622 \begin_layout Standard
55627 \begin_inset space ~
55632 font color and use the option
55635 \begin_inset space ~
55640 in the document settings under
55643 \begin_inset space ~
55649 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
55650 \begin_inset space ~
55654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55656 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
55664 \begin_layout Standard
55665 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
55671 \begin_layout Standard
55675 \begin_inset space ~
55684 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
55686 \begin_inset space ~
55689 Code after a forced page break:
55692 \begin_layout Itemize
55693 For the page color:
55694 \begin_inset Newline newline
55701 pagecolor{color name}
55704 \begin_layout Itemize
55705 For the text color:
55706 \begin_inset Newline newline
55716 \begin_layout Standard
55717 You are restricted to one of
55759 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
55766 \begin_inset space ~
55772 \begin_inset Newline newline
55775 If you have changed a text or background color,
55776 you can use the following names to refer to them:
55779 \begin_layout Itemize
55785 \begin_inset Newline newline
55790 page_backgroundcolor
55793 \begin_layout Itemize
55797 \begin_inset space ~
55803 \begin_inset Newline newline
55811 \begin_layout Itemize
55815 \begin_inset space ~
55821 \begin_inset Newline newline
55829 \begin_layout Itemize
55833 \begin_inset space ~
55839 \begin_inset Newline newline
55847 \begin_layout Standard
55848 To see how to define and use custom colors,
55852 \begin_inset space ~
55860 \begin_inset space ~
55868 \begin_layout Section
55870 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
55874 \begin_layout Standard
55876 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
55877 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
55878 \begin_inset space ~
55882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55884 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
55893 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
55894 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
55897 \begin_layout Standard
55899 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
55902 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
55905 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
55907 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
55908 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
55909 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
55912 \begin_layout Section
55916 \begin_layout Standard
55917 Here you can adjust the
55921 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
55925 as described in section
55926 \begin_inset space ~
55930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55932 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
55938 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
55942 \begin_layout Standard
55944 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
55945 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
55946 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
55947 The most common one are:
55950 \begin_layout Description
55952 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
55953 right Line numbers to the right margin
55956 \begin_layout Description
55958 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
55959 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
55963 \begin_layout Description
55965 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
55966 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
55969 \begin_layout Description
55971 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
55972 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
55975 \begin_layout Description
55977 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
55978 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
55981 \begin_layout Description
55983 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
55985 \begin_inset space ~
55988 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
55993 \begin_layout Section
55997 \begin_layout Standard
55998 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56004 \begin_inset Index idx
56009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56012 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56032 \begin_inset Index idx
56037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56040 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56059 \begin_inset Index idx
56064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56067 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56082 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56086 Sectioned bibliography
56088 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56094 \begin_inset Index idx
56099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56102 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56122 you can select the style files and specify further options.
56124 you can select a document-specific
56128 for the generation of the bibliography.
56129 For a further description of these possibilities see section
56130 \begin_inset space ~
56134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56136 reference "sec:Bibliography"
56144 \begin_layout Section
56148 \begin_layout Standard
56149 Here you can define the
56153 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
56154 \begin_inset space ~
56158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56160 reference "sec:Index"
56168 \begin_layout Section
56172 \begin_layout Standard
56173 The PDF properties are explained in section
56174 \begin_inset space ~
56178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56180 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56188 \begin_layout Section
56192 \begin_layout Standard
56193 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
56194 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56200 \begin_inset Index idx
56205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56208 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56228 \begin_inset Index idx
56233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56236 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56256 \begin_inset Index idx
56261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56264 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56284 \begin_inset Index idx
56289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56312 \begin_inset Index idx
56317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56320 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56340 \begin_inset Index idx
56345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56348 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56368 \begin_inset Index idx
56373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56376 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56396 \begin_inset Index idx
56401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56404 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56424 \begin_inset Index idx
56429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56432 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56451 \begin_inset Index idx
56456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56474 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
56477 \begin_layout Description
56478 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
56479 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
56480 -errors in formulas,
56481 ensure that you have this enabled.
56484 \begin_layout Description
56485 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
56486 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
56487 -errors in formulas,
56488 ensure that you have this enabled.
56491 \begin_layout Description
56492 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
56496 \begin_inset space ~
56508 \begin_layout Description
56509 esint is used for special integral characters,
56513 \begin_inset space ~
56525 \begin_layout Description
56526 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
56538 \begin_layout Description
56539 mathtools is used for the math commands
56580 and labeled arrows,
56581 see the corresponding sections in the
56588 \begin_layout Description
56589 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
56592 Chemical Symbols and Equations
56601 \begin_layout Description
56602 stackrel is used for the math command
56620 \begin_layout Description
56621 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
56624 \begin_layout Description
56625 undertilde is used for the math command
56634 Accents for one Character
56643 \begin_layout Section
56645 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
56647 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
56653 \begin_layout Standard
56655 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
56656 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
56659 \begin_layout Standard
56661 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
56662 The float placement options
56663 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
56666 are described in the section
56669 \begin_inset space ~
56673 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
56675 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
56683 \begin_inset space ~
56691 \begin_layout Section
56695 \begin_layout Standard
56696 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
56698 Program Code Listings
56703 \begin_inset space ~
56711 \begin_layout Section
56715 \begin_layout Standard
56716 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
56725 set to be used and set the
56730 The itemize environment is described in section
56731 \begin_inset space ~
56735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56737 reference "sec:Itemize"
56745 \begin_layout Standard
56746 You can furthermore specify a
56749 \begin_inset space ~
56754 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56755 command of the desired character.
56756 For example to use the € sign,
56757 you have to insert the command
56764 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
56766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56770 \begin_inset space \space{}
56774 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
56784 To find the command for a math symbol,
56785 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
56788 \begin_layout Standard
56789 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
56792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56798 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
56799 -packages in the preamble (menu
56801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
56802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
56805 \begin_inset space ~
56811 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
56815 usepackage{textcomp}
56818 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
56822 usepackage{amssymb}
56832 \begin_layout Section
56836 \begin_layout Standard
56837 Branches are described in section
56838 \begin_inset space ~
56842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56844 reference "sec:Branches"
56852 \begin_layout Section
56854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56856 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
56863 \begin_layout Standard
56864 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
56867 \begin_layout Description
56869 \begin_inset space ~
56873 \begin_inset space ~
56877 The format that is used when you enter
56878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56899 View Master Document
56900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56907 Update Master Document
56908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56915 menu or the toolbar.
56916 The default is set in
56918 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
56919 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
56921 \begin_inset space ~
56924 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
56929 \begin_inset space ~
56933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56935 reference "sec:File-Formats"
56943 \begin_layout Description
56945 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
56947 \begin_inset space ~
56951 \begin_inset space ~
56955 \begin_inset space ~
56958 programs If this is switched on,
56964 option which is needed with some packages.
56965 Note that this comes with security risks,
56966 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
56969 \begin_layout Description
56971 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
56973 \begin_inset space ~
56977 \begin_inset space ~
56980 Options offers settings for the
56988 \begin_layout Itemize
56992 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
56994 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
56996 \begin_inset space ~
57002 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
57004 \begin_inset space ~
57008 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
57014 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
57016 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
57017 settings for the menu
57019 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57023 \begin_inset space ~
57027 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
57030 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
57031 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
57036 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57038 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
57040 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57043 or a detailed description see section
57045 Reverse DVI/PDF search
57050 \begin_inset space ~
57056 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
57060 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
57064 \begin_layout Itemize
57066 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
57069 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
57071 determines whether so-called
57072 \begin_inset Quotes els
57076 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57080 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
57081 \begin_inset Quotes els
57085 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57088 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
57089 (such as sections or captions),
57090 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
57092 This setting is on by default,
57093 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
57095 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
57096 you can uncheck this.
57097 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
57099 just leave it checked.
57105 \begin_layout Description
57107 \begin_inset space ~
57111 \begin_inset space ~
57114 Options offers settings for the export format
57122 \begin_inset space ~
57127 will assure that the output follows exactly version
57128 \begin_inset space ~
57131 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
57135 \begin_inset space ~
57140 settings are described in detail in section
57142 Math Output in XHTML
57147 \begin_inset space ~
57156 \begin_inset space ~
57160 \begin_inset space ~
57165 is used for the size of equations in the output.
57168 \begin_layout Description
57170 \begin_inset space ~
57175 Save transient properties
57177 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57178 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57182 \begin_layout Itemize
57183 the activation of change tracking
57186 \begin_layout Itemize
57187 the output of tracked changes
57190 \begin_layout Itemize
57191 the recording of the document directory path.
57194 \begin_layout Standard
57195 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
57199 \begin_layout Section
57207 \begin_layout Standard
57208 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57209 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
57211 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
57213 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
57216 \begin_layout Standard
57217 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57218 -syntax is given in section
57219 \begin_inset space ~
57223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57225 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
57233 \begin_layout Chapter
57239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57241 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
57246 \begin_inset Index idx
57251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57260 \begin_layout Standard
57261 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
57263 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57267 It has the following submenus.
57270 \begin_layout Section
57274 \begin_layout Subsection
57278 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57279 User Interface File
57280 \begin_inset Index idx
57285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57287 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57302 \begin_inset Index idx
57307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57309 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57326 \begin_layout Standard
57327 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
57328 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
57336 \begin_layout Description
57341 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
57344 \begin_layout Description
57351 the menu entries in popup context menus
57354 \begin_layout Description
57359 specifies the toolbar buttons
57362 \begin_layout Standard
57363 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
57364 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
57367 \begin_layout Standard
57368 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
57382 entries must be finished with an explicit
57412 and in the case of the
57413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57425 The syntax for the entries is:
57428 \begin_layout Standard
57429 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57458 \begin_layout Standard
57460 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57463 All the \SpecialChar LyX
57464 -functions are listed in the menu
57466 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
57468 \begin_inset space ~
57476 \begin_layout Standard
57477 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
57483 \begin_layout Standard
57485 assuming you use the menu
57487 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57490 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
57491 you can add the line
57494 \begin_layout Standard
57495 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57519 \begin_layout Standard
57521 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57536 to have the sixth bookmark.
57539 \begin_layout Standard
57543 \begin_inset space ~
57548 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
57549 's toolbar buttons.
57550 The currently available icon sets are compared in
57551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57554 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
57562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57566 \begin_layout Standard
57569 Enable tool tips in main work area
57571 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
57574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57578 \begin_layout Standard
57583 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
57584 should display in the menu
57586 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
57588 \begin_inset space ~
57596 \begin_layout Subsection
57600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57604 \begin_layout Standard
57607 Restore window layouts and geometries
57610 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
57614 \begin_layout Standard
57617 Restore cursor positions
57619 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
57622 \begin_layout Standard
57625 Load opened files from last session
57627 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
57631 \begin_layout Standard
57634 Clear all session information
57636 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
57637 sessions (cursor positions,
57638 names of last opened documents,
57642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57646 name "subsec:Backup documents"
57651 \begin_inset Index idx
57656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57658 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57675 \begin_layout Standard
57678 Backup original documents when saving
57680 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was
57681 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618729
57682 opened or when it was
57684 saved the last time.
57685 It is stored in the
57688 \begin_inset space ~
57694 \begin_inset space ~
57698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57700 reference "sec:Paths"
57705 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
57708 \begin_inset space ~
57714 The backup file has the file extension
57715 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618692
57719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57725 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618694
57729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57733 \change_inserted -712698321 1676618670
57734 and the same name than the original file.
57738 \begin_inset space ~
57744 the file has the full path in its file name,
57746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57761 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
57764 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618585
57770 \begin_layout Standard
57772 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622933
57775 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
57778 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
57779 These files which are stored as
57783 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
57784 Should \SpecialChar LyX
57785 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
57786 this file can be used as a resort.
57789 \begin_layout Standard
57791 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623063
57792 Please read section
57793 \begin_inset space ~
57797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57799 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
57803 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
57804 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
57809 \begin_layout Standard
57811 \change_deleted -712698321 1676619117
57818 you can specify the time between backup saves.
57823 \begin_layout Standard
57826 Save documents compressed by default
57828 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
57829 \begin_inset space ~
57833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57835 reference "subsec:Compressed"
57841 This applies to newly created documents only.
57842 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
57843 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619181
57847 \begin_layout Standard
57849 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619393
57852 Save the document directory path
57854 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
57856 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
57857 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
57862 \begin_layout Standard
57864 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618508
57865 Apart from that LyX autosaves document in regular intervals.
57866 It is used to restore unsaved changes in the document if the program crashes.
57867 The temporary file name is
57876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57877 Windows & work area
57880 \begin_layout Standard
57883 Open documents in tabs
57886 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
57890 \begin_layout Standard
57895 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
57900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57902 \begin_inset space ~
57906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57908 reference "sec:Paths"
57913 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
57922 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
57924 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
57925 instance is created for each file.
57928 \begin_layout Standard
57931 Single close-tab button
57934 there will only be one close button (
57944 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
57945 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
57946 Regardless of this option,
57947 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
57950 \begin_layout Standard
57951 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57960 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
57961 before the change takes effect.
57969 \begin_layout Standard
57974 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
57975 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
57977 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
57981 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
57982 and only want to close the view in once instance.
57985 \begin_layout Subsection
57987 \begin_inset Index idx
57992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57994 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58011 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
58018 \begin_layout Standard
58019 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
58023 \begin_layout Standard
58024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58033 This section only deals with the fonts
58037 the \SpecialChar LyX
58039 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
58040 and set in the menu
58042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
58043 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
58054 \begin_layout Standard
58074 (depends on the system) as its
58077 \begin_inset space ~
58093 \begin_layout Standard
58094 You can change the font size with the
58101 \begin_layout Standard
58106 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
58108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58111 points have the size of 1
58112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58117 \begin_inset space ~
58121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58123 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
58129 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
58130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58134 The sizes are explained in detail in section
58135 \begin_inset space ~
58139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58141 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
58149 \begin_layout Subsection
58151 \begin_inset Index idx
58156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58158 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58174 \begin_inset Index idx
58179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58181 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58198 \begin_layout Standard
58199 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
58200 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
58207 \begin_layout Standard
58208 By checking the option
58212 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
58220 \begin_inset space ~
58224 \begin_inset space ~
58229 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
58232 \begin_layout Subsection
58234 \begin_inset Index idx
58239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58241 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58258 \begin_layout Standard
58259 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
58263 \begin_layout Standard
58268 enables previewing snippets of your document.
58269 This feature is described in section
58270 \begin_inset space ~
58274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58276 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
58284 \begin_layout Standard
58285 Checking the option
58288 \begin_inset space ~
58292 \begin_inset space ~
58296 \begin_inset space ~
58301 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
58304 \begin_layout Section
58306 \begin_inset Index idx
58311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58313 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58330 \begin_layout Subsection
58334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58338 \begin_layout Standard
58341 Cursor follows scrollbar
58343 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
58346 \begin_layout Standard
58347 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
58348 If you set the value to zero,
58349 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
58352 \begin_layout Standard
58355 Scroll below end of document
58357 is self-explanatory.
58360 \begin_layout Standard
58361 In \SpecialChar LyX
58362 one can jump from word to word by pressing
58369 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
58371 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
58372 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
58373 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
58377 \begin_layout Standard
58379 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
58382 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
58384 is only relevant in documents that
58390 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
58398 markup) with this option selected.
58399 It the option is not selected,
58400 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
58401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58406 \begin_inset Quotes els
58410 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58414 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
58415 dissolving from insets.
58426 \begin_inset Quotes els
58430 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58433 notwithstanding the state of this option.
58438 \begin_layout Standard
58441 Sort environments alphabetically
58443 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
58446 \begin_layout Standard
58449 Group environments by their category
58451 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
58454 \begin_layout Standard
58459 options determine the editing style for math macros,
58469 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
58473 \begin_layout Standard
58475 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
58478 Search drive for cited files
58480 allows \SpecialChar LyX
58481 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
58484 \begin_inset space ~
58488 \begin_inset space ~
58492 \begin_inset space ~
58496 \begin_inset space ~
58499 Content\SpecialChar ldots
58502 context menu on a citation.
58506 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
58508 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
58511 field determines the search pattern.
58513 \begin_inset space ~
58517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58519 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
58529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58533 \begin_layout Standard
58534 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58539 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58540 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58541 the text then appears centered.
58544 \begin_layout Subsection
58546 \begin_inset Index idx
58551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58558 \begin_inset Index idx
58563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58565 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58582 \begin_layout Standard
58587 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
58589 Several binding files are available,
58593 \begin_layout Description
58594 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
58597 \begin_layout Description
58598 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
58609 \begin_layout Description
58610 mac.bind a set of bindings for
58613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58621 \begin_layout Standard
58622 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
58628 and binding files for special languages.
58629 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
58631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58635 \begin_inset space \space{}
58639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58647 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
58648 in a certain language,
58650 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
58653 \begin_layout Standard
58654 Some binding files,
58660 only have a limited scope.
58661 When looking at the end of the file
58666 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
58669 \begin_layout Standard
58673 \begin_inset space ~
58677 \begin_inset space ~
58682 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
58685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58689 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
58694 \begin_inset Index idx
58699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58701 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58718 \begin_layout Standard
58719 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
58720 functions and the bound shortcuts.
58721 To find functions easily,
58722 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
58724 Show key-bindings containing
58727 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
58728 Insert there for example as keyword
58729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58736 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
58737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58746 one function can have more than one shortcut.
58747 All \SpecialChar LyX
58748 functions are also listed in the file
58753 that you will find in the
58760 \begin_layout Standard
58762 to add the shortcut
58771 select the function and press the
58776 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
58777 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
58780 \begin_layout Standard
58781 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
58782 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
58783 Function definition with “
58786 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
58788 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
58793 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
58795 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
58798 \begin_layout Standard
58799 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
58803 \begin_layout Standard
58804 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
58805 The syntax of the entries is:
58808 \begin_layout Standard
58814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58833 \begin_layout Standard
58836 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
58837 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
58838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58871 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
58872 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
58873 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
58874 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
58879 you needed to specify it as
58884 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
58885 you don't have to care for these specifics.
58887 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
58890 \begin_layout Subsection
58892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58894 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
58899 \begin_inset Index idx
58904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58911 \begin_inset Index idx
58916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58918 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58935 \begin_layout Standard
58936 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
58937 For the case where this is not possible,
58939 provides keyboard maps.
58942 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
58946 \begin_inset space ~
58950 \begin_inset space ~
58955 and select the keyboard map file named
58962 \begin_layout Standard
58977 you can select the first and second with
58980 arg "keymap-primary"
58986 arg "keymap-secondary"
58989 respectively or toggle between them with
58992 arg "keymap-toggle"
58998 \begin_layout Standard
58999 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59008 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
59016 \begin_layout Standard
59017 You can also specify the mouse
59019 Wheel scrolling speed
59022 The standard value is 1.0;
59023 higher values speed up the scrolling,
59024 lower ones slow it down.
59027 Middle mouse button pasting
59029 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
59032 \begin_layout Standard
59040 \begin_inset space ~
59044 \begin_inset space ~
59050 you can select a key for zooming.
59051 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
59052 the text is zoomed.
59055 \begin_layout Subsection
59059 \begin_layout Standard
59060 Input completion is described in section
59061 \begin_inset space ~
59065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59067 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
59075 \begin_layout Section
59077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59084 \begin_inset Index idx
59089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59096 \begin_inset Index idx
59101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59103 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59120 \begin_layout Standard
59121 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
59122 are normally determined during the installation.
59123 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
59126 \begin_layout Description
59128 \begin_inset space ~
59131 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
59132 's working directory.
59133 It is the default when you
59145 \begin_inset space ~
59153 \begin_layout Description
59155 \begin_inset space ~
59158 templates This directory
59159 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
59160 contains the templates that are shown
59161 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
59162 will be opened when you use the menu
59163 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
59168 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59170 \begin_inset space ~
59174 \begin_inset space ~
59182 \begin_layout Description
59184 \begin_inset space ~
59187 files This directory
59188 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
59189 will be opened when you use the
59190 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
59191 contains the example files that are listed in
59194 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
59203 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59205 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
59207 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
59213 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
59215 \begin_inset Newline newline
59219 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59232 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
59233 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
59243 \begin_layout Description
59245 \begin_inset space ~
59249 \begin_inset Index idx
59254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59256 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59270 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
59271 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
59272 \begin_inset space ~
59276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59278 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59288 will be used to save the backups.
59289 \begin_inset Newline newline
59292 Backup files have the ending
59293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59303 \begin_layout Description
59305 \begin_inset space ~
59308 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
59309 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
59311 \begin_inset Newline newline
59319 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59325 You can edit this file with the program
59334 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
59335 in its preferences under
59338 \begin_inset space ~
59344 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
59349 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
59351 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
59358 and \SpecialChar LyX
59359 need to be running the same time.
59360 \begin_inset Newline newline
59363 The pipe is also used for the
59369 \begin_inset space ~
59373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59375 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59381 \begin_inset Newline newline
59384 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
59385 Server-Pipe on Windows,
59386 you must use this pipe name:
59387 \begin_inset Newline newline
59403 \begin_layout Description
59405 \begin_inset space ~
59408 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
59411 \begin_layout Description
59413 \begin_inset space ~
59416 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
59417 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
59420 \begin_layout Description
59422 \begin_inset space ~
59425 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
59430 You only need to specify it if you are using
59434 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
59435 For \SpecialChar LyX
59440 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
59443 \begin_layout Description
59445 \begin_inset space ~
59448 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
59449 When \SpecialChar LyX
59450 needs to use an external program,
59451 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
59452 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
59454 so you normally don't have to modify it.
59456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59464 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
59467 \begin_layout Description
59469 \begin_inset space ~
59472 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
59473 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
59474 code or in the document preamble.
59475 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
59476 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
59477 If files are included,
59478 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
59479 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
59481 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
59482 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
59485 \begin_layout Section
59489 \begin_layout Standard
59490 Here you can insert your
59499 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
59500 as described in section
59501 \begin_inset space ~
59505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59507 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
59513 to mark changes you make as yours.
59516 \begin_layout Section
59518 \begin_inset Index idx
59523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59525 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59540 \begin_inset Index idx
59545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59547 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59564 \begin_layout Subsection
59566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59568 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
59575 \begin_layout Description
59577 \begin_inset space ~
59581 \begin_inset space ~
59584 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
59586 You can find its actual translation status here:
59588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59590 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
59596 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
59600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59602 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
59603 LaTeX Language Support
59608 \begin_layout Description
59610 \begin_inset space ~
59613 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
59614 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
59615 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
59616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59632 The most widespread language package is
59637 \begin_inset Index idx
59642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59645 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59660 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
59662 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
59663 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
59664 come with the alternative language package
59669 \begin_inset Index idx
59674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59677 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59691 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
59693 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
59698 The available selections are described in section
59699 \begin_inset space ~
59703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59705 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
59713 \begin_layout Description
59715 \begin_inset space ~
59719 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
59720 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
59721 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
59723 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
59727 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
59731 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
59733 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
59737 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
59738 that is used to switch to a different language
59739 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
59740 to start the package
59744 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
59745 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
59749 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
59750 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
59753 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
59757 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
59766 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
59774 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
59777 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
59779 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
59784 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
59802 selectlanguage{$$lang}
59803 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
59811 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
59816 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
59822 this setting is ignored.
59827 \begin_layout Description
59829 \begin_inset space ~
59833 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
59840 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
59841 Use this if the language switch set in
59845 needs to be explicitly ended,
59850 's alternative command
59854 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
59855 \SpecialChar allowbreak
59858 end{otherlanguage*}
59862 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
59865 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
59866 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
59872 selectlanguage{$$lang}
59874 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
59878 selectlanguage{$$lang}
59884 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
59890 this setting is ignored.
59895 \begin_layout Description
59897 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
59899 \begin_inset space ~
59903 \begin_inset space ~
59906 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
59909 \begin_layout Description
59911 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
59913 \begin_inset space ~
59917 \begin_inset space ~
59920 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
59926 \begin_layout Description
59928 \begin_inset space ~
59932 \begin_inset space ~
59936 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
59938 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
59941 this option is set,
59942 the languages used in the document will be added
59943 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
59946 to the document class options
59947 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
59948 rather than the language package options.
59949 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
59954 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
59955 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
59957 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
59958 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
59960 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
59964 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
59965 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
59974 \begin_layout Description
59976 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
59978 \begin_inset space ~
59982 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
59984 \begin_inset space ~
59988 \begin_inset space ~
59992 \begin_inset space ~
59998 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
60000 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
60003 this option is set,
60005 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
60006 the language switch defined in
60009 \begin_inset space ~
60014 is output at the beginning of the document,
60015 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
60016 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
60017 This might be needed if you use a non-default
60020 \begin_inset space ~
60025 or if a package resets the document language.
60027 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
60028 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
60029 documents start with the chosen document language.
60030 When this option is not set,
60034 \begin_inset space ~
60039 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60041 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
60044 \begin_inset space ~
60054 \begin_layout Description
60056 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
60058 \begin_inset space ~
60062 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
60064 \begin_inset space ~
60068 \begin_inset space ~
60072 \begin_inset space ~
60078 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
60082 \begin_inset space ~
60086 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
60087 Set document language explicitly
60093 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
60095 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
60102 \begin_inset space ~
60108 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
60110 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
60114 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
60116 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
60119 the end of the document.
60120 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
60124 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60125 \paragraph_spacing single
60127 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
60133 \begin_layout Description
60135 \begin_inset space ~
60139 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
60141 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
60145 \begin_inset space ~
60149 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
60152 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
60154 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
60158 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
60161 in a language different
60162 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
60164 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
60167 the document language will be
60168 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
60169 marked (by default with a blue
60172 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
60174 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
60178 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
60182 \begin_layout Description
60184 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
60186 \begin_inset space ~
60190 \begin_inset space ~
60194 \begin_inset space ~
60199 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
60200 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
60201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60205 English and Hebrew:
60207 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
60213 \begin_layout Description
60215 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
60217 \begin_inset space ~
60221 \begin_inset space ~
60224 support Enables the use of languages,
60225 written from right to left (RTL),
60232 \begin_layout Description
60234 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60236 \begin_inset space ~
60240 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
60242 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60246 \begin_inset space ~
60250 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
60251 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
60252 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
60254 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
60258 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
60260 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
60261 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
60265 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60267 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
60271 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
60276 \begin_layout Standard
60281 means that the cursor
60282 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
60283 follows the logic of the text direction,
60284 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
60286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60290 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
60291 Hebrew embedded in English),
60292 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
60297 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
60298 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
60299 right arrow in this specific case always means:
60304 in text (even if this means:
60311 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60312 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
60313 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
60314 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
60315 since the cursor then follows a coherent
60316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60327 \begin_layout Standard
60329 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
60335 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
60337 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
60338 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
60343 ) when coming from the left.
60344 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
60345 at the expense of the text logic.
60346 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60347 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
60348 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
60353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60355 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
60359 \begin_layout Description
60361 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
60363 \begin_inset space ~
60367 \begin_inset space ~
60370 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
60372 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
60373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60379 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
60382 \begin_layout Description
60384 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
60386 \begin_inset space ~
60390 \begin_inset space ~
60393 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60399 \begin_layout Subsection
60403 \begin_layout Standard
60404 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
60405 \begin_inset space ~
60409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60411 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
60419 \begin_layout Section
60423 \begin_layout Subsection
60425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60427 name "subsec:General-output"
60434 \begin_layout Description
60436 \begin_inset space ~
60439 search Commands that will be used for the menu
60441 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
60443 \begin_inset space ~
60449 For a detailed description see section
60451 Reverse DVI/PDF search
60456 \begin_inset space ~
60464 \begin_layout Description
60466 \begin_inset space ~
60469 Options Options for the program
60473 that is used for the export format
60479 \begin_inset space ~
60483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60485 reference "subsec:Export"
60491 Possible options are listed in the
60496 \begin_inset Newline newline
60500 \begin_inset Flex URL
60503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60505 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
60515 \begin_layout Description
60517 \begin_inset space ~
60521 \begin_inset space ~
60524 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
60526 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60527 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
60529 \begin_inset space ~
60535 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
60538 \begin_layout Description
60540 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
60542 \begin_inset space ~
60546 \begin_inset Index idx
60551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60558 \begin_inset Index idx
60563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60565 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60579 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
60580 \begin_inset Newline newline
60584 \begin_inset Flex URL
60587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60589 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
60595 \begin_inset Newline newline
60598 For example the format
60599 \begin_inset Newline newline
60603 \begin_inset Newline newline
60606 prints the date as day/month/year.
60611 \begin_layout Description
60613 \begin_inset space ~
60617 \begin_inset space ~
60620 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
60621 is allowed to overwrite on export.
60624 \begin_layout Subsection
60630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60632 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
60637 \begin_inset Index idx
60642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60644 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60662 \begin_layout Description
60664 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
60666 \begin_inset space ~
60674 \begin_inset space ~
60678 \begin_inset space ~
60681 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
60686 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
60710 are used for Cyrillic.
60711 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
60713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60726 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
60727 sets up in the background.
60728 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
60733 \begin_layout Description
60735 \begin_inset space ~
60739 \begin_inset space ~
60743 \begin_inset space ~
60747 \begin_inset space ~
60750 options They only have an effect when the program
60754 is used as DVI-viewer,
60755 read its manual to find out more.
60758 \begin_layout Standard
60759 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
60760 But before you change something,
60761 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
60764 \begin_layout Description
60766 \begin_inset space ~
60769 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
60771 \begin_inset space ~
60775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60777 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
60785 \begin_layout Description
60787 \begin_inset space ~
60790 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
60792 \begin_inset space ~
60796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60798 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
60806 \begin_layout Description
60808 \begin_inset space ~
60811 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
60813 \begin_inset space ~
60817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60819 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
60827 \begin_layout Description
60833 \begin_inset space ~
60836 command Command for the program
60838 Check\SpecialChar TeX
60841 that is described in the section
60843 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
60848 Additional Features
60853 \begin_layout Standard
60854 There are additionally the following options:
60857 \begin_layout Description
60859 \begin_inset space ~
60863 \begin_inset space ~
60867 \begin_inset space ~
60871 \begin_inset space ~
60876 \begin_inset space ~
60879 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
60881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60898 to separate folders.
60899 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
60901 \begin_inset Index idx
60906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60913 \begin_inset Index idx
60918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60920 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60937 \begin_layout Description
60939 \begin_inset space ~
60943 \begin_inset space ~
60947 \begin_inset space ~
60951 \begin_inset space ~
60955 \begin_inset space ~
60959 \begin_inset space ~
60962 changes Removes all manually set
60968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
60969 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
60971 \begin_inset space ~
60976 dialog when changing the document class.
60979 \begin_layout Section
60981 \begin_inset space ~
60985 \begin_inset Index idx
60990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60999 \begin_layout Subsection
61001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61003 name "subsec:Converters"
61008 \begin_inset Index idx
61013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61022 \begin_layout Standard
61023 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
61024 You can modify converters or create new ones.
61025 To modify a converter,
61027 change the entry of the
61034 \begin_inset space ~
61039 field and press the
61044 To create a new converter,
61045 select an existing one,
61046 select a different format in the
61049 \begin_inset space ~
61059 field and press the
61066 \begin_layout Standard
61069 Converter File Cache
61076 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
61078 Maximum Age (in days
61081 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
61082 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
61085 \begin_layout Standard
61086 More about converters,
61087 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
61088 is described in the section
61099 \begin_layout Subsection
61101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61103 name "sec:File-Formats"
61108 \begin_inset Index idx
61113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61120 \begin_inset Index idx
61125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61134 \begin_layout Standard
61135 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
61145 programs that should be used for certain formats.
61148 \begin_layout Standard
61149 You can also define the
61151 Default output format
61153 that is used when you use
61157 View Master Document
61161 Update Master Document
61167 menu or the toolbar.
61170 \begin_layout Standard
61171 More about formats and their options is described in the section
61182 \begin_layout Standard
61183 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
61184 's temporary directory,
61185 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
61186 This is done by specifying a
61191 More about this is described in the section
61202 \begin_layout Chapter
61203 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61205 \begin_inset Index idx
61210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61219 name "chap:Units-available-in"
61226 \begin_layout Standard
61228 \begin_inset space ~
61232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61234 reference "tab:Units"
61239 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61240 and used in this documentation.
61243 \begin_layout Standard
61244 \begin_inset Float table
61251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61252 \begin_inset Caption Standard
61254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61270 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
61276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61278 \begin_inset Tabular
61279 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
61280 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
61281 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61282 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
61283 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61436 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
61440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61707 scaled point (65536
61708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61775 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
61780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61899 % of original image width
61904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61988 \begin_layout Standard
61989 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
61992 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
61999 \begin_layout Bibliography
62000 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62001 LatexCommand bibitem
62008 The \SpecialChar LyX
62011 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62014 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
62020 \begin_inset Newline newline
62024 \begin_inset Flex URL
62027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62029 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
62037 \begin_layout Bibliography
62038 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62039 LatexCommand bibitem
62040 key "latexcompanion"
62045 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
62048 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62049 Companion Second Edition.
62056 \begin_layout Bibliography
62057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62058 LatexCommand bibitem
62064 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
62068 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
62076 \begin_layout Bibliography
62077 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62078 LatexCommand bibitem
62089 A Document Preparation System.
62097 \begin_layout Bibliography
62098 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62099 LatexCommand bibitem
62109 The \SpecialChar TeX
62117 \begin_layout Bibliography
62118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62119 LatexCommand bibitem
62125 The \SpecialChar TeX
62127 \begin_inset Newline newline
62131 \begin_inset Flex URL
62134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62136 https://ctan.org/topic
62144 \begin_layout Bibliography
62145 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62146 LatexCommand bibitem
62152 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62154 \begin_inset Newline newline
62158 \begin_inset Flex URL
62161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62163 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
62171 \begin_layout Bibliography
62172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62173 LatexCommand bibitem
62180 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62182 name "Documentation"
62183 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
62190 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62194 \begin_inset Newline newline
62198 \begin_inset Flex URL
62201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62203 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
62211 \begin_layout Bibliography
62212 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62213 LatexCommand bibitem
62220 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62222 name "Documentation"
62223 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
62228 how to use the program
62230 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62234 \begin_inset Newline newline
62238 \begin_inset Flex URL
62241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62243 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
62251 \begin_layout Bibliography
62252 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62253 LatexCommand bibitem
62260 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62262 name "Documentation"
62263 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
62268 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62274 \begin_inset Index idx
62279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62297 \begin_inset Newline newline
62301 \begin_inset Flex URL
62304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62306 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
62314 \begin_layout Bibliography
62315 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62316 LatexCommand bibitem
62323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62325 name "Documentation"
62326 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
62331 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62337 \begin_inset Index idx
62342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62345 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62360 \begin_inset Newline newline
62364 \begin_inset Flex URL
62367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62369 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
62377 \begin_layout Bibliography
62378 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62379 LatexCommand bibitem
62386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62388 name "Documentation"
62389 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
62399 \begin_inset Newline newline
62403 \begin_inset Flex URL
62406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62408 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
62416 \begin_layout Bibliography
62417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62418 LatexCommand bibitem
62419 key "makeindex-man"
62425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62428 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
62438 \begin_inset Newline newline
62442 \begin_inset Flex URL
62445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62447 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
62453 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
62457 \begin_layout Bibliography
62459 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
62460 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62461 LatexCommand bibitem
62468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62470 name "Documentation"
62471 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
62481 \begin_inset Newline newline
62485 \begin_inset Flex URL
62488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62490 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
62492 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
62504 \begin_layout Bibliography
62505 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62506 LatexCommand bibitem
62513 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62515 name "Documentation"
62516 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
62526 \begin_inset Newline newline
62530 \begin_inset Flex URL
62533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62535 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
62543 \begin_layout Bibliography
62544 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62545 LatexCommand bibitem
62552 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62554 name "Documentation"
62555 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
62560 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
62562 \begin_inset Newline newline
62566 \begin_inset Flex URL
62569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62571 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
62579 \begin_layout Bibliography
62580 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62581 LatexCommand bibitem
62588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62590 name "Documentation"
62591 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
62596 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62602 \begin_inset Index idx
62607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62610 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62625 \begin_inset Newline newline
62629 \begin_inset Flex URL
62632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62634 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
62642 \begin_layout Bibliography
62643 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62644 LatexCommand bibitem
62651 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62653 name "Documentation"
62654 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
62659 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62665 \begin_inset Index idx
62670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62673 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62688 \begin_inset Newline newline
62692 \begin_inset Flex URL
62695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62697 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
62705 \begin_layout Bibliography
62706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62707 LatexCommand bibitem
62714 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62716 name "Documentation"
62717 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
62722 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62728 \begin_inset Index idx
62733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62736 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62751 \begin_inset Newline newline
62755 \begin_inset Flex URL
62758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62760 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
62768 \begin_layout Bibliography
62769 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62770 LatexCommand bibitem
62777 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62779 name "Documentation"
62780 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
62785 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62791 \begin_inset Index idx
62796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62799 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62814 \begin_inset Newline newline
62818 \begin_inset Flex URL
62821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62823 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
62831 \begin_layout Bibliography
62832 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62833 LatexCommand bibitem
62840 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62842 name "Documentation"
62843 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
62848 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62854 \begin_inset Index idx
62859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62862 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62877 \begin_inset Newline newline
62881 \begin_inset Flex URL
62884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62886 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
62894 \begin_layout Bibliography
62895 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62896 LatexCommand bibitem
62903 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62905 name "Documentation"
62906 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
62911 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62917 \begin_inset Index idx
62922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62925 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62940 \begin_inset Newline newline
62944 \begin_inset Flex URL
62947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62949 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
62957 \begin_layout Bibliography
62958 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62959 LatexCommand bibitem
62966 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62968 name "Documentation"
62969 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
62974 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62980 \begin_inset Index idx
62985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62988 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63003 \begin_inset Newline newline
63007 \begin_inset Flex URL
63010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63012 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
63020 \begin_layout Bibliography
63021 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63022 LatexCommand bibitem
63029 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63031 name "Documentation"
63032 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
63037 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63043 \begin_inset Index idx
63048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63051 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63066 \begin_inset Newline newline
63070 \begin_inset Flex URL
63073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63075 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
63083 \begin_layout Bibliography
63084 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63085 LatexCommand bibitem
63092 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63095 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
63100 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63102 \begin_inset Newline newline
63106 \begin_inset Flex URL
63109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63111 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
63119 \begin_layout Bibliography
63120 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63121 LatexCommand bibitem
63128 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63131 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
63136 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63138 \begin_inset Newline newline
63142 \begin_inset Flex URL
63145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63147 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
63155 \begin_layout Bibliography
63156 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63157 LatexCommand bibitem
63164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63167 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
63172 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63173 for Cyrillic languages:
63174 \begin_inset Newline newline
63178 \begin_inset Flex URL
63181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63183 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
63191 \begin_layout Bibliography
63192 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63193 LatexCommand bibitem
63200 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63203 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
63208 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63210 \begin_inset Newline newline
63214 \begin_inset Flex URL
63217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63219 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
63227 \begin_layout Bibliography
63228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63229 LatexCommand bibitem
63236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63239 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
63244 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63246 \begin_inset Newline newline
63250 \begin_inset Flex URL
63253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63255 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
63263 \begin_layout Bibliography
63264 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63265 LatexCommand bibitem
63272 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63275 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
63280 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63282 \begin_inset Newline newline
63286 \begin_inset Flex URL
63289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63291 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
63299 \begin_layout Standard
63300 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
63307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63335 \begin_inset Note Note
63338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63345 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
63346 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
63354 \begin_layout Standard
63355 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
63356 LatexCommand bibtex
63357 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
63358 options "biblio/alphadin"
63365 \begin_layout Standard
63366 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63370 \begin_layout Standard
63374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63380 pagedeclaration}[1]{
63383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63390 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
63398 \begin_inset Note Note
63401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63402 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
63404 \begin_inset space ~
63408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
63410 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
63423 \begin_layout Standard
63424 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
63425 LatexCommand printnomenclature
63431 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
63432 LatexCommand printindex